Pesómetro - PUV DF S E SL01 5904 - 00 - 0 PDF

CLIENTE/CUSTOMER:
PROYECTO/PROJECT:
AMPLIACION, MEJORAMIENTO Y MODERNIZACION
DE SISTEMA DE EMBARQUE DE CONCENTRADOS DE COBRE
PUERTO VENTANAS-SITIO 3
TTULO/ TITLE:
Dosier Tcnico Electrico y de IC Pesometro
Belt scale Technical Electrical & IC Dossier
NMERO DE DOCUMENTO DE PROYECTO/PROJECT DOC NUMBER: ED: REV:
PUV-DF-S-E-SL01-5904 00 0
PROPSITO DE LA EDICIN/ ISSUE PURPOSE: INFORMATION FECHA/DATE:

3-05-2016
SELLO DF/DF STAMP: APROB/ E.S FECHA/ 3-05-2016

APPROVED: DATE:
COMPROB/ FECHA/
E.S. 3-05-2016
CHECKED: DATE:
REALIZ/ FECHA/ 3-05-2016

M.C.V
ISSUED: DATE:
N DOCUMENTO DE PROYECTO/PROJECT DOCUMENT NUMBER:

HOJA DE CONTROL DE CAMBIOS/CHANGES CONTROL SHEET
DESCRIPCION DE LOS CAMBIOS/
ED/ED RV/REV FECHA/DATE SECCIONES/SECTIONS
CHANGES DESCRIPTIONS
00 B 15-3-16 FIRST EDITION
00 0 3-05-16 SECOND EDITION
Este documento y la informacin contenida This drawing and the information shown
en l son propiedad de Duro felguera.S.A. o herewith are property of Duro Felguera, SA
Pgina 1 de 2
filiales. Se prohbe la reproduccin por or its subsidiaries. Reproduction by any
cualquier medio sin la autorizacin escrita del means is forbidden without the written
propietario. authorization from the owner.
Fecha de Impresin: 22/06/2016

INDEX
1. Data sheets
2. Load cells
3. Integrator 2201
4. Profibus-DP
5.Terminal wiring
6. GSD file Profibus communications
7. Junction box
1. Data sheets
EQUIPMENT INTEGRATOR MODEL MT2201F Q.ty
TAG WT04 ITEM WT04 P PANNEL F FIELD 1

SERVICE BELT SCALE MODEL : 10-14/4 N DI SERIE (USA)
DESCRIPTION MODEL SLOT POSITION

OPTION HARDWARE SET-UP
MOTHER BOARD OP13 X A B - SPEED FILTER
OPEN
SW3
CLOSED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CLOSED = COLD START FORCED
VERSION : POWER SUPPLY : 120 V (AVILABLE : 110V ; 120V ; 220V ; 240V)
50/60 Hz
A/D BOARD J6 OP1 X A B - SENSING SELECTION
OP2 X A B - A (CLOSED) = INTERNAL SENSING
CURRENT OUT 2101IOUT1SCH J5

BOARD DEFAULT X YES OUT : 4-20 mA (AVAILABLE : 0-20 mA / 4-20 mA)
NO X RATE WEIGHT Kg/m SPEED
ANALOG I/O 2101IOUT2SCH OUT 1 : mA (AVAILABLE : 0-20 mA / 4-20 mA)
BOARD YES OUT 2 : mA (AVAILABLE : 0-20 mA / 4-20 mA)
(2IN / 2 OUT) X NO INPUT 1 : ________________ R= ________________ INCLIN.
INPUT 2 : ________________ R= ________________ MOISTURE
COMM "A" 2101COMMSCH J2 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6

BOARD
YES RS232 A A A A A A
X NO RS485 B B B B MDP TRM
C.L.20mA B B A A A C
PROFIBUS J4
MDP (OP5) : A = NORMAL B = MULTI-DROP
BOARD
TPM (OP6) : A TERMINATED B NOT TERMINATED
OP7 : A STANDARD B PRINTER
SYSTEM DATA SPEED TRANSMITTER

FULL SCALE 1500,00 t/h TOTALIZER : 1500,00 MODEL : 60-12C Q.ty : 1
BELT SPEED 2,2 m/sec PULSE / ROUND 50
TAIL DIAM.. : 500 mm TAIL R.P.M. 84,03 MAX FREQ. : 70 Hz - FREQ. MIN.: Hz
SIM R-CAL : 165000
LOAD CELL/S BELT SCALE

MODEL : 9363 - 500 Kg Q.t : 4 BELT SCALE MODEL 10-14/4-1066 CODE : 313
TYPE TENSION SENSIBILITY : 3 mV/V NOTES :
NET F .S. 907,48 kg = 13,61 mV PLANT : BELT SCALES FOR ITEMS CVR-04
TARE LOAD 524,67 kg = 7,87 mV
TEST A EMISSIONE/ISSUED 25/01/2016 CAVENAGO
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE COMP.
CERTIFIED BY : CUSTOMER
APPROVED BY :
DATE :
DURO
DURO FULGUERA
FELGUERA
FILE N : 30859-BS04-S001 30859-MT04-S
SHEET 1 DI 6
EQUIPMENT MODEL
INTEGRATOR MT2201F
TAG WT04 ITEM WT04 Q:ty
SERVICE BELT SCALE MODEL : 10-14/4 SERIAL N 1
MENU' 1
CAL ZERO MANUAL ZERO

CAL SPAN MANUAL SPAN
MAIN MENU' 2
DISPLAY SCROLL
1. MEASURE UNIT metric (metric) 2. TOTALIZATION UNITS t (t)
3. LENGHT UNIT m (m) 4. RATE UNITS t/h (t/h)
5. LOAD CELL UNIT kg (kg) 6. LANGUAGE SPANISH (english)
7. DATE ____________ (dd-mm-yy) 8. TIME ____________ (24ore)
9. RUN DISPLAY LINE 3 ____________ (no display) 10. DAMPING DISPLAY RATE ____________ (2sec)
11. DAMPING DISPLAY LOAD ____________ 12. DAMPING DISPLAY SPEED ____________ (2sec)
SCALE DATA SCROLL
1. MAX SCALE CAPACITY 1500 (500.0t) 2. SCALE DIVISION 1 (0,1)

3. BELT SCALE CODE 313 (301) 3a. PIVOT TO LOAD CELL -
3b. N OF WEIGHT IDLERS 4 3c. PIVOT TO 1st IDLER -
3d. PIVOT TO 2nd IDLER - 3e. PIVOT TO 3nd IDLER -
3f. PIVOT TO 4sh IDLER - 3g. PIVOT TO 5th IDLER -
3h. PIVOT TO 6th IDLER - 3i. PIVOT TO TEST WGHT. HEIGHT -
3I. PIVOT TO TEST WGHT. LENGHT - 3m. PIVOT TO WEIGHBR. HEIGHT -
3n. ROLL TO WEIGHBR. LENGHT - 3o. N OF THE LOAD CELL 4
4. IDLER SPACING 1,2 (1000mm) 5. CONVEYOR'S ANGLE 3,41 (0,0 deg)
6. LOAD CELL CAPACITY 500 (100kg) 7. LOAD CELL SENSITIVITY 3 (2mV/V)
8a. CELL 1 RESISTANCE 350 (350ohm) 8b. CELL 2 RESISTANCE 350 (350ohm)
8c. CELL 3 RESISTANCE 350 (350ohm) 8d. CELL 4 RESISTANCE 350 (350ohm)
8e. CELL 5 RESISTANCE ____________ (350ohm) 8f. CELL 6 RESISTANCE ____________ (350ohm)
9. SPEED INPUT single (single) 10. ZERO DEAD BAND RANGE ____________ (0%)
11. WEIGH AND MEASURE MODE yes (no)
A EMISSIONE/ISSUED 25/01/2016 CAVENAGO

TEST REV DESCR. DATE COMP.
APPROVED BY : DURO FULGUERA Thermo Ramsey

DURO FELGUERA
DATE : 30859-MT04-S
FILE N : 30859-BS04-S001 SHEET 2 OF 6
EQUIPMENT MODEL
INTEGRATOR MT2201F
CALIBRATION DATA SCROLL
1. CALIBRATION MODE WEIGHT (RCAL) 2. RCAL SELECTED 165000 (165Kohm)

3. RCAL CAL- CONSTANT ____________ (1,252t) 4. CHAIN WEIGHT ____________ (kg/m)
5. CHAIN CAL-CONSTANT ____________ (0,000t) 6. TOTAL TEST WEIGHT 480 (kg)
7. WEIGHT CAL-CONSTANT ____________ (0,000t) 8. CALIBRATION INTERVAL ____________ (0 days)
9. CALIBRATION DATE ____________
11. TEST DURATION ______________ TOTAL _____________ PARTIAL _____________ MANUAL
- BELT LENGHT ____________ (31,5m) 10. R-CAL / MAT FACTOR ____________
- N REVOLUTION ____________ (3) - CHAIN / MAT FACTOR ____________
- TEST TIME ____________ (105 sec) - WEIGHT / MAT FACTOR ____________
MAX SPEED CAPACITY ____________ (0,90m/sec) 12. AUTO ZERO TRACKING YES NO
12a. A.Z.T. RANGE ____________ (3%)
12b. A.Z.T. MAX DEVIATION ____________ (4%)
MAIN MENU' 3
PROTECTION SCROLL
1. PROTECTION LEVEL ______________ NONE _____________ LIMITED _____________ PROTECTED
DIAGNOSTIC SCROLL
1. A / D GROSS ____________ 2. SIGNAL ON LOAD CELL ____________

A / D NET ____________ 2a. LOAD CELL OUTPUT ZERO ____________ (15)
3. PRESCALE ____________ 2b. LOAD CELL OUTPUT SPAN ____________ (3501)
PULSES / MINUTE ____________ 4. SERVICE PASSWORD ____________
3a. TEST DURATION TOTAL PULSES ____________ (4019) 5. PASWORD OPERATORE ____________
3b. TEST DURATION TOTAL LENGHT ____________ (94,5m) 6. SOFTWARE VERSION ____________
9. BOARD SLOT 1 ____________ 10. BOARD SLOT 2 ____________
11. BOARD SLOT 3 ____________ 12. BOARD SLOT 4 PROFIBUS
13. BOARD SLOT 5 I/O BOARD 14. BOARD SLOT 6 A/D BOARD


DATE : DURO FELGUERA 30859-MT04-S
FILE N : 30859 BS04 S001
30859-BS04-S001 SHEET 3 OF 6
EQUIPMENT MODEL
INTEGRATOR MT2201F
MAIN MENU' 4
I/O DEFINE SCROLL
1. CURRENT OUTPUT 1 DEFINE RATE CURRENT OUTPUT 2 DEFINE ____________

CURRENT OUTPUT 3 DEFINE ____________ CURRENT OUTPUT 4 DEFINE ____________
1a. CURRENT OUTPUT 1 RANGE 4-20 CURRENT OUTPUT 2 RANGE ____________
CURRENT OUTPUT 3 RANGE ____________ CURRENT OUTPUT 4 RANGE ____________
1b. CURRENT OUTPUT 1 DELAY ____________ CURRENT OUTPUT 2 DELAY ____________
CURRENT OUTPUT 3 DELAY ____________ CURRENT OUTPUT 4 DELAY ____________
1c. CURRENT OUTPUT 1 DAMP. ____________ CURRENT OUTPUT 2 DAMP. ____________
CURRENT OUTPUT 3 DAMP. ____________ CURRENT OUTPUT 4 DAMP. ____________
2. ANALOG INPUT 1 DEFINE ____________ 3. ANALOG INPUT 2 DEFINE ____________
2a. INPUT 1 CALIBRATE LOW ______ % ______ mA 3a. INPUT 2 CALIBRATE LOW ______ % ______ mA
2b. INPUT 1 CALIBRATE HIGH ______ % ______ mA 3b. INPUT 2 CALIBRATE HIGH ______ % ______ mA
4 DIGITAL INPUT DEFINE
4. _____________ IN 2 _____________ IN 3 _____________ IN 4 ____________
IN 5 _____________ IN 6 _____________ IN 7 _____________ IN 8 _______________
5. DIGITAL OUTPUT DEFINE OUT 1 READY OUT 2 ALARMS OUT 3 TOTALIZER OUT 4 FAIL
OUT 5 _____________ OUT 6 _____________ OUT 7 _____________ OUT 8 _____________
6. REMOTE COUNTER DEV. ____________ (1,00t) 7. REMOTE COUNTER PULSE ____________ (0,1 sec)
8. BCD OUTPUT VARIABLE ____________ (none)
8a. BCD OUTPUT POLARITY ____________ (negativ) 10. CLIP DETECTOR MODE ____________ (manual)
8b. BCD OUTPUT PARITY ____________ (no) 10a. CLIP DETECTOR LENGHT ____________ (0,300 m)
ALARM SCROLL
1. RATE ALARM YES NO 2. LOAD ALARM YES NO
1a. LOW RATE SET _____% _____(un) ______sec 2a. LOW LOAD SET _____% _____kg/m ______sec
1b. HIGH RATE SET _____% _____(un) ______sec 10. HIGH LOAD SET _____% _____kg/m ______sec
3. SPEED ALARM YES NO 4. BELT SLIP ALARM YES NO
3a. LOW SPEED SET _____% _____m/sec ______sec 4a. BELT SLIP SET ________% _________sec
3b. HIGH SPEED SET _____% _____m/sec ______sec


DATE :
DURO FELGUERA 30859-MT04-S
EQUIPMENT MODEL
INTEGRATOR MT2201F
5. ALARM DEFINITION AS NONE ALARMS SHUT DOWN
1 CLOCK FAIL ________ 2 LOAD CELL FAIL _________ 3 RAM FAIL _________ 4 ROM FAIL ________
5 SPEED SENSOR ________ 6 HIGH LOAD _________ 7 LOW LOAD _________ 8 HIGH RATE ________
9 LOW RATE ________ 10 HIGH SPEED _________ 11 LOW SPEED _________ 12 WARM START ________
13 COLD START ________ 14 P. D. CALIBR. _________ 15 CALIBRATION TIME _________ 16 EXT ALARM 1 ________
17 EXT ALARM 2 ________ 18 EXT ALARM 3 _________ 19 OVFL TOTAL _________ 20 AZT LIMIT ________
21 BATCH DEV. ________ 22 BCD ERROR _________ 25 PRINTER ERROR _________ 26 COMM ERROR ________
29 MATH ERROR. ________
LOAD OUT SCROLL
1. PRESET WEIGHT _______________ (0,0 t) 2. PREA ACT CORRECT _______________ (manual)

3. START DELAY _______________ (5 sec) 2a. PRE ACT VALUE _______________ (0,0 t)
4. COASTING TIME _______________ (5 sec) 2b. PRE ACT RANGE _______________ (0,0 t)
5. BATCH DEVIATION _______________ (0) 2c. PRE ACT LENGHT _______________ (0,000 m)
6. BATCH PRINTER _______________ (no) 7. POSITION BATCH N X = ________ Y = ________
8. POSITION BATCH Q.ty X= _______ Y= _______ 9. POSITION BATCH TOTAL X = ________ Y = ________
MAIN MENU' 5
COMM A SCROLL
1. BAUD RATE PORT 1 ______________ (9600) 2. SET PARITYPORT 1 ______________ (no parity)
3. STOP BIT PORT 1 ______________ (1) 4. WORD LENGHT PORT 1 ______________ (8)
5. PROTOCOL PORT 1 ______________ (printer) 5a. CLEAR TO SEND PORT 1 ______________ (disabled)
6. ADDRESS PORT 1 ______________ (1) 7. ACCESS PROT. PORT 1 ______________ (none)
8. BAUD RATE PORT 2 ______________ (9600) 9. SET PARITYPORT 2 ______________ (none)


EQUIPMENT MODEL
INTEGRATOR MT2201F
PRINTER SCROLL
1. HANDSHAKING ____________ (none) 2. END OF LINE ____________ (cr + lf)

3. DELAY END OF LINE ____________ (0 sec) 4. FORM FEED ____________ (no)
5. PRINT INTERVAL ____________ (0 min)
6. PRINT TIME 1 ____________ (off) 7. PRINT ALARMS ____________ (no)
PRINT TIME 2 ____________ (off) 8. TOT REP. FORMAT ____________ (default 1)
PRINT TIME 3 ____________ (off)
PRINT TIME 4 ____________ (off) 9i. POSIZ. RESET TOTAL X= ______ (5) Y = _______(1)
9a. NUMBER OF STRING 1 ____________ (1) 9j. POSIZ. MASTER TOTAL X= ______ (6) Y = _______(1)
9b. CONTENTS STRING 1 ________________________ 9k. POSITION DATE X= ______ (7) Y = _______(1)
9c. POSITION STRING 1 X= ______ (1) Y = _______(1) 9l. POSITION TIME X= ______ (8) Y = _______(1)
9d CONTENTS STRING 2
9d. ________________________ 9m
9m. POSITION RATE X= ______ (9) Y = _______(1)
(1)
9e. POSITION STRING 2 X= ______ (1) Y = _______(1) 9n. POSITION AVER RATE X= ______ (0) Y = _______(1)
9f. CONTENTS STRING 3 ________________________ 9o. POSITION RUNNING X= ______ (0) Y = _______(1)
9g. POSITION STRING 3 X= ______ (3) Y = _______(1)
9h. POS. OPER. TOTAL X= ______ (4) Y = _______(1)
MAIN MENU' 6
LINEARIZATION SCROLL
1. LINEARIZATION YES NO 2. LOAD FULL SCALE ____________ (50 kg/m)

3a. LIN FACTOR 0-10% ____________ (1,000000) 3f. LIN FACTOR 50-60% ____________ (1,000000)
3b. LIN FACTOR 10-20% ____________ (1,000000) 3g. LIN FACTOR. 60-70% ____________ (1,000000)
3c. LIN FACTOR 20-30% ____________ (1,000000) 3h. LIN FACTOR 70-80% ____________ (1,000000)
3d LIN FACTOR 30-40% ____________ (1,000000) 3j. LIN FACTOR. 80-90% ____________ (1,000000)
3e. LIN FACTOR 40-50% ____________ (1,000000) 3k. LIN FACTOR 90-100% ____________ (1,000000)


N :
FILE N 30859-BS04-S001
30859 BS04 S001 SHEET 6 OF 6
EQUIPMENT INTEGRATOR MODEL MT2201F Q.ty
TAG WT02 ITEM WT02 P PANNEL F FIELD 1

SERVICE BELT SCALE MODEL : 10-14/4 N DI SERIE (USA)
DESCRIPTION MODEL SLOT POSITION

OPTION HARDWARE SET-UP
MOTHER BOARD OP13 X A B - SPEED FILTER
OPEN
SW3
CLOSED
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CLOSED = COLD START FORCED
VERSION : POWER SUPPLY : 120 V (AVILABLE : 110V ; 120V ; 220V ; 240V)
50/60 Hz
A/D BOARD J6 OP1 X A B - SENSING SELECTION
OP2 X A B - A (CLOSED) = INTERNAL SENSING
CURRENT OUT 2101IOUT1SCH J5

BOARD DEFAULT X YES OUT : 4-20 mA (AVAILABLE : 0-20 mA / 4-20 mA)
NO X RATE WEIGHT Kg/m SPEED
ANALOG I/O 2101IOUT2SCH OUT 1 : mA (AVAILABLE : 0-20 mA / 4-20 mA)
BOARD YES OUT 2 : mA (AVAILABLE : 0-20 mA / 4-20 mA)
(2IN / 2 OUT) X NO INPUT 1 : ________________ R= ________________ INCLIN.
INPUT 2 : ________________ R= ________________ MOISTURE
COMM "A" 2101COMMSCH J2 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6

BOARD
YES RS232 A A A A A A
X NO RS485 B B B B MDP TRM
C.L.20mA B B A A A C
PROFIBUS J4
MDP (OP5) : A = NORMAL B = MULTI-DROP
BOARD
TPM (OP6) : A TERMINATED B NOT TERMINATED
OP7 : A STANDARD B PRINTER
SYSTEM DATA SPEED TRANSMITTER

FULL SCALE 1500,00 t/h TOTALIZER : 1500,00 MODEL : 60-12C Q.ty : 1
BELT SPEED 2,2 m/sec PULSE / ROUND 50
TAIL DIAM.. : 500 mm TAIL R.P.M. 84,03 MAX FREQ. : 70 Hz - FREQ. MIN.: Hz
SIM R-CAL : 165000
LOAD CELL/S BELT SCALE

MODEL : 9363 - 500 Kg Q.t : 4 BELT SCALE MODEL 10-14/4-1066 CODE : 313
TYPE TENSION SENSIBILITY : 3 mV/V NOTES :
NET F .S. 907,48 kg = 13,61 mV PLANT : BELT SCALES FOR ITEMS CE-02
TARE LOAD 524,67 kg = 7,87 mV
TEST A EMISSIONE/ISSUED 25/01/2016 CAVENAGO
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE COMP.
APPROVED BY :
DATE : DURO FELGUERA

DURO FULGUERA
FILE N : 30859-BS02-S001 30859-MT02-S
SHEET 1 DI 6
EQUIPMENT MODEL
INTEGRATOR MT2201F
MENU' 1
CAL ZERO MANUAL ZERO

CAL SPAN MANUAL SPAN
MAIN MENU' 2
DISPLAY SCROLL
1. MEASURE UNIT metric (metric) 2. TOTALIZATION UNITS t (t)
3. LENGHT UNIT m (m) 4. RATE UNITS t/h (t/h)
5. LOAD CELL UNIT kg (kg) 6. LANGUAGE SPANISH (english)
7. DATE ____________ (dd-mm-yy) 8. TIME ____________ (24ore)
9. RUN DISPLAY LINE 3 ____________ (no display) 10. DAMPING DISPLAY RATE ____________ (2sec)
11. DAMPING DISPLAY LOAD ____________ 12. DAMPING DISPLAY SPEED ____________ (2sec)
SCALE DATA SCROLL
1. MAX SCALE CAPACITY 1500 (500.0t) 2. SCALE DIVISION 1 (0,1)

3. BELT SCALE CODE 313 (301) 3a. PIVOT TO LOAD CELL -
3b. N OF WEIGHT IDLERS 4 3c. PIVOT TO 1st IDLER -
3d. PIVOT TO 2nd IDLER - 3e. PIVOT TO 3nd IDLER -
3f. PIVOT TO 4sh IDLER - 3g. PIVOT TO 5th IDLER -
3h. PIVOT TO 6th IDLER - 3i. PIVOT TO TEST WGHT. HEIGHT -
3I. PIVOT TO TEST WGHT. LENGHT - 3m. PIVOT TO WEIGHBR. HEIGHT -
3n. ROLL TO WEIGHBR. LENGHT - 3o. N OF THE LOAD CELL 4
4. IDLER SPACING 1,2 (1000mm) 5. CONVEYOR'S ANGLE 3,41 (0,0 deg)
6. LOAD CELL CAPACITY 500 (100kg) 7. LOAD CELL SENSITIVITY 3 (2mV/V)
8a. CELL 1 RESISTANCE 350 (350ohm) 8b. CELL 2 RESISTANCE 350 (350ohm)
8c. CELL 3 RESISTANCE 350 (350ohm) 8d. CELL 4 RESISTANCE 350 (350ohm)
8e. CELL 5 RESISTANCE ____________ (350ohm) 8f. CELL 6 RESISTANCE ____________ (350ohm)
9. SPEED INPUT single (single) 10. ZERO DEAD BAND RANGE ____________ (0%)
11. WEIGH AND MEASURE MODE yes (no)


DATE :
EQUIPMENT MODEL
INTEGRATOR MT2201F
1. CALIBRATION MODE WEIGHT (RCAL) 2. RCAL SELECTED 165000 (165Kohm)

3. RCAL CAL- CONSTANT ____________ (1,252t) 4. CHAIN WEIGHT ____________ (kg/m)
5. CHAIN CAL-CONSTANT ____________ (0,000t) 6. TOTAL TEST WEIGHT 480 (kg)
7. WEIGHT CAL-CONSTANT ____________ (0,000t) 8. CALIBRATION INTERVAL ____________ (0 days)
9. CALIBRATION DATE ____________
11. TEST DURATION ______________ TOTAL _____________ PARTIAL _____________ MANUAL
- BELT LENGHT ____________ (31,5m) 10. R-CAL / MAT FACTOR ____________
- N REVOLUTION ____________ (3) - CHAIN / MAT FACTOR ____________
- TEST TIME ____________ (105 sec) - WEIGHT / MAT FACTOR ____________
MAX SPEED CAPACITY ____________ (0,90m/sec) 12. AUTO ZERO TRACKING YES NO
12a. A.Z.T. RANGE ____________ (3%)
12b. A.Z.T. MAX DEVIATION ____________ (4%)
MAIN MENU' 3
PROTECTION SCROLL
1. PROTECTION LEVEL ______________ NONE _____________ LIMITED _____________ PROTECTED
DIAGNOSTIC SCROLL
1. A / D GROSS ____________ 2. SIGNAL ON LOAD CELL ____________

A / D NET ____________ 2a. LOAD CELL OUTPUT ZERO ____________ (15)
3. PRESCALE ____________ 2b. LOAD CELL OUTPUT SPAN ____________ (3501)
PULSES / MINUTE ____________ 4. SERVICE PASSWORD ____________
3a. TEST DURATION TOTAL PULSES ____________ (4019) 5. PASWORD OPERATORE ____________
3b. TEST DURATION TOTAL LENGHT ____________ (94,5m) 6. SOFTWARE VERSION ____________
9. BOARD SLOT 1 ____________ 10. BOARD SLOT 2 ____________
11. BOARD SLOT 3 ____________ 12. BOARD SLOT 4 PROFIBUS
13. BOARD SLOT 5 I/O BOARD 14. BOARD SLOT 6 A/D BOARD


DATE :
FILE N : 30859 BS02 S001
30859-BS02-S001 SHEET 3 OF 6
EQUIPMENT MODEL
INTEGRATOR MT2201F
MAIN MENU' 4
I/O DEFINE SCROLL
1. CURRENT OUTPUT 1 DEFINE RATE CURRENT OUTPUT 2 DEFINE ____________

CURRENT OUTPUT 3 DEFINE ____________ CURRENT OUTPUT 4 DEFINE ____________
1a. CURRENT OUTPUT 1 RANGE 4-20 CURRENT OUTPUT 2 RANGE ____________
CURRENT OUTPUT 3 RANGE ____________ CURRENT OUTPUT 4 RANGE ____________
1b. CURRENT OUTPUT 1 DELAY ____________ CURRENT OUTPUT 2 DELAY ____________
CURRENT OUTPUT 3 DELAY ____________ CURRENT OUTPUT 4 DELAY ____________
1c. CURRENT OUTPUT 1 DAMP. ____________ CURRENT OUTPUT 2 DAMP. ____________
CURRENT OUTPUT 3 DAMP. ____________ CURRENT OUTPUT 4 DAMP. ____________
2. ANALOG INPUT 1 DEFINE ____________ 3. ANALOG INPUT 2 DEFINE ____________
2a. INPUT 1 CALIBRATE LOW ______ % ______ mA 3a. INPUT 2 CALIBRATE LOW ______ % ______ mA
2b. INPUT 1 CALIBRATE HIGH ______ % ______ mA 3b. INPUT 2 CALIBRATE HIGH ______ % ______ mA
4 DIGITAL INPUT DEFINE
4. _____________ IN 2 _____________ IN 3 _____________ IN 4 ____________
IN 5 _____________ IN 6 _____________ IN 7 _____________ IN 8 _______________
5. DIGITAL OUTPUT DEFINE OUT 1 READY OUT 2 ALARMS OUT 3 TOTALIZER OUT 4 FAIL
OUT 5 _____________ OUT 6 _____________ OUT 7 _____________ OUT 8 _____________
6. REMOTE COUNTER DEV. ____________ (1,00t) 7. REMOTE COUNTER PULSE ____________ (0,1 sec)
8. BCD OUTPUT VARIABLE ____________ (none)
8a. BCD OUTPUT POLARITY ____________ (negativ) 10. CLIP DETECTOR MODE ____________ (manual)
8b. BCD OUTPUT PARITY ____________ (no) 10a. CLIP DETECTOR LENGHT ____________ (0,300 m)
ALARM SCROLL
1. RATE ALARM YES NO 2. LOAD ALARM YES NO
1a. LOW RATE SET _____% _____(un) ______sec 2a. LOW LOAD SET _____% _____kg/m ______sec
1b. HIGH RATE SET _____% _____(un) ______sec 10. HIGH LOAD SET _____% _____kg/m ______sec
3. SPEED ALARM YES NO 4. BELT SLIP ALARM YES NO
3a. LOW SPEED SET _____% _____m/sec ______sec 4a. BELT SLIP SET ________% _________sec
3b. HIGH SPEED SET _____% _____m/sec ______sec


DATE :
EQUIPMENT MODEL
INTEGRATOR MT2201F
5. ALARM DEFINITION AS NONE ALARMS SHUT DOWN
1 CLOCK FAIL ________ 2 LOAD CELL FAIL _________ 3 RAM FAIL _________ 4 ROM FAIL ________
5 SPEED SENSOR ________ 6 HIGH LOAD _________ 7 LOW LOAD _________ 8 HIGH RATE ________
9 LOW RATE ________ 10 HIGH SPEED _________ 11 LOW SPEED _________ 12 WARM START ________
13 COLD START ________ 14 P. D. CALIBR. _________ 15 CALIBRATION TIME _________ 16 EXT ALARM 1 ________
17 EXT ALARM 2 ________ 18 EXT ALARM 3 _________ 19 OVFL TOTAL _________ 20 AZT LIMIT ________
21 BATCH DEV. ________ 22 BCD ERROR _________ 25 PRINTER ERROR _________ 26 COMM ERROR ________
29 MATH ERROR. ________
LOAD OUT SCROLL
1. PRESET WEIGHT _______________ (0,0 t) 2. PREA ACT CORRECT _______________ (manual)

3. START DELAY _______________ (5 sec) 2a. PRE ACT VALUE _______________ (0,0 t)
4. COASTING TIME _______________ (5 sec) 2b. PRE ACT RANGE _______________ (0,0 t)
5. BATCH DEVIATION _______________ (0) 2c. PRE ACT LENGHT _______________ (0,000 m)
6. BATCH PRINTER _______________ (no) 7. POSITION BATCH N X = ________ Y = ________
8. POSITION BATCH Q.ty X= _______ Y= _______ 9. POSITION BATCH TOTAL X = ________ Y = ________
MAIN MENU' 5
COMM A SCROLL
1. BAUD RATE PORT 1 ______________ (9600) 2. SET PARITYPORT 1 ______________ (no parity)
8. BAUD RATE PORT 2 ______________ (9600) 9. SET PARITYPORT 2 ______________ (none)


DATE :
EQUIPMENT MODEL
INTEGRATOR MT2201F
PRINTER SCROLL
1. HANDSHAKING ____________ (none) 2. END OF LINE ____________ (cr + lf)

3. DELAY END OF LINE ____________ (0 sec) 4. FORM FEED ____________ (no)
5. PRINT INTERVAL ____________ (0 min)
6. PRINT TIME 1 ____________ (off) 7. PRINT ALARMS ____________ (no)
PRINT TIME 2 ____________ (off) 8. TOT REP. FORMAT ____________ (default 1)
PRINT TIME 3 ____________ (off)
PRINT TIME 4 ____________ (off) 9i. POSIZ. RESET TOTAL X= ______ (5) Y = _______(1)
9a. NUMBER OF STRING 1 ____________ (1) 9j. POSIZ. MASTER TOTAL X= ______ (6) Y = _______(1)
9b. CONTENTS STRING 1 ________________________ 9k. POSITION DATE X= ______ (7) Y = _______(1)
9c. POSITION STRING 1 X= ______ (1) Y = _______(1) 9l. POSITION TIME X= ______ (8) Y = _______(1)
9d CONTENTS STRING 2
9d. ________________________ 9m
9m. POSITION RATE X= ______ (9) Y = _______(1)
(1)
9e. POSITION STRING 2 X= ______ (1) Y = _______(1) 9n. POSITION AVER RATE X= ______ (0) Y = _______(1)
9f. CONTENTS STRING 3 ________________________ 9o. POSITION RUNNING X= ______ (0) Y = _______(1)
9g. POSITION STRING 3 X= ______ (3) Y = _______(1)
9h. POS. OPER. TOTAL X= ______ (4) Y = _______(1)
MAIN MENU' 6
1. LINEARIZATION YES NO 2. LOAD FULL SCALE ____________ (50 kg/m)

3a. LIN FACTOR 0-10% ____________ (1,000000) 3f. LIN FACTOR 50-60% ____________ (1,000000)
3b. LIN FACTOR 10-20% ____________ (1,000000) 3g. LIN FACTOR. 60-70% ____________ (1,000000)
3c. LIN FACTOR 20-30% ____________ (1,000000) 3h. LIN FACTOR 70-80% ____________ (1,000000)
3d LIN FACTOR 30-40% ____________ (1,000000) 3j. LIN FACTOR. 80-90% ____________ (1,000000)
3e. LIN FACTOR 40-50% ____________ (1,000000) 3k. LIN FACTOR 90-100% ____________ (1,000000)


DURO FELGUERA
DATE : 30859-MT02-S
N :
FILE N 30859-BS02-S001
30859 BS02 S001 SHEET 6 OF 6
2. Load cells
3. Integrator 2201
Micro-Tech 2000
Model 2201 Integrator
User Guide
REC-3950 Rev G P/N 058610
Revision History
Revision Number Date Revised ECO # Revision Specifics

Revision 4 October 1998 New Release
Revision B April 2000 Software Version 33.00.03.05
Revision C May 2002 Software Version 33.17.03.09
Revision D February 2007 1102 Edit mounting and installation section
Revision E October 2011 2372 Humidity Note and New Format
Revision F December 2013 3412 33.17.03.16 Adding Zero Ready section
Revision G January 2014 3435 Change power consumption to operating
current, ref. UL re-certification to 3rd edition.
2014 Thermo Fisher Scientific Inc. All rights reserved. All trademarks are the property of Thermo Fisher Scientific
Inc. and its subsidiaries. Specifications, terms and pricing are subject to change. Not all products are available in all
countries. Please consult your local sales representative for details.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................................11
APPLICATION.............................................................................................................................................................11
Main Features.....................................................................................................................................................12
INTEGRATOR CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................................................12
INTEGRATOR GENERAL DESCRIPTION............................................................................................................................13
Measuring Functions...........................................................................................................................................13
Monitoring Functions...........................................................................................................................................13
Print Functions....................................................................................................................................................14
Communications (Optional)..................................................................................................................................14
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................................................15
Measuring Functions...........................................................................................................................................15
Load Out (Optional).............................................................................................................................................17
Monitoring Functions...........................................................................................................................................17
UNPACKING AND INSPECTION.......................................................................................................................................17
STORAGE.................................................................................................................................................................18
SYMBOL IDENTIFICATION.............................................................................................................................................18
SPECIFICATIONS........................................................................................................................................................19
CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION...............................................................................................................................21
FIELD MOUNT INSTALLATION........................................................................................................................................21
Mounting............................................................................................................................................................21
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS................................................................................................................................................24
UTILITY CONNECTIONS (INCOMING POWER)....................................................................................................................25
Wiring................................................................................................................................................................25
PANEL MOUNT INSTALLATION.......................................................................................................................................29
Mounting............................................................................................................................................................29
Wiring..............................................................................................................................................................212
INTEGRATOR CONFIGURATION....................................................................................................................................212
Mother Board Configuration Jumpers and Switches..............................................................................................212
Field Terminal Board.........................................................................................................................................216
(Field Mount Only).............................................................................................................................................216
A/D Board Jumpers...........................................................................................................................................216
Analog Input/Output Board.................................................................................................................................221
Communications Board Configuration.................................................................................................................221
INITIAL SETUP PROCEDURE........................................................................................................................................224
Determining Installation Parameters....................................................................................................................224
Programming the Micro-Tech 2201 Integrator......................................................................................................233
CHAPTER 3 OPERATION....................................................................................................................................31
OVERVIEW................................................................................................................................................................31
FRONT PANEL...........................................................................................................................................................31
LED Status Indicators..........................................................................................................................................32
Keyboard...........................................................................................................................................................32
Display...............................................................................................................................................................33
MENU DISPLAYS........................................................................................................................................................33
Normal Power On................................................................................................................................................34
Hardware Configuration.......................................................................................................................................34
RUN MENU...............................................................................................................................................................36
Main Run...........................................................................................................................................................36
Reset Total.........................................................................................................................................................37
Material Calibration.............................................................................................................................................37
Alarm Pending....................................................................................................................................................37
TOTAL KEY...............................................................................................................................................................39
START-STOP KEYS...................................................................................................................................................310
CALIBRATION..........................................................................................................................................................310
Zero Calibrate Scroll.........................................................................................................................................311
Span Calibration Scroll......................................................................................................................................313
Material Span Calibration...................................................................................................................................320
Permanent Scroll Record...................................................................................................................................325
Setup Scrolls..................................................................................................................................................325
Permanent Field Record....................................................................................................................................334
Calibration Report.............................................................................................................................................335
CHAPTER 4 MAINTENANCE...............................................................................................................................41
FREQUENT CHECKPOINTS...........................................................................................................................................41
TROUBLESHOOTING....................................................................................................................................................42
Alarm Message...................................................................................................................................................42
Alarm List...........................................................................................................................................................42
Micro-Tech 2000 Cold Start..................................................................................................................................47
Internal Test Procedure.......................................................................................................................................49
Load Cell Excitation and Signal Voltage..............................................................................................................410
Resetting Master Total Procedure.......................................................................................................................411
To Remove a Forgotten Password......................................................................................................................412
LITHIUM BATTERY REPLACEMENT................................................................................................................................412
DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTE..............................................................................................................................413
Cleaning Instructions.........................................................................................................................................413
CHAPTER 5 SERVICE, REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT PARTS.................................................................................51
PARTS ORDERING INFORMATION...................................................................................................................................52
PHONE/FAX CONTACTS FOR THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC OFFICES.....................................................................................53
PARTS LIST..............................................................................................................................................................54
DISPOSAL OF HAZARDOUS WASTE................................................................................................................................54
APPENDIX A WEIGHBRIDGE PHYSICAL PARAMETERS.......................................................................................A1
RULES FOR ENTERING THE PARAMETERS.......................................................................................................................A4
TABLES FOR THERMO FISHER SCIENTIFIC WEIGHBRIDGES.................................................................................................A5
APPENDIX B LINEARIZATION............................................................................................................................B1
APPENDIX C DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT................................................................................................................C1
MOTHER BOARD DIGITAL I/O........................................................................................................................................C1
Digital Inputs.......................................................................................................................................................C1
Digital Outputs....................................................................................................................................................C2
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD CONFIGURATION.............................................................................................................C2
16 In\4 Out DIO Board Specification......................................................................................................................C4
4 In/16 Out DIO Board Specification......................................................................................................................C4
BCD INPUT OPTION...................................................................................................................................................C6
APPENDIX D MT2201 MENUS............................................................................................................................D1
MENU DISPLAYS........................................................................................................................................................D1
MAIN MENU 1............................................................................................................................................................D2
Zero Calibrate Scroll............................................................................................................................................D3
Span Calibration Scroll........................................................................................................................................D5
Material Spam Calibration..................................................................................................................................D11
MAIN MENU 2..........................................................................................................................................................D15
Display.............................................................................................................................................................D16
Scale Data.......................................................................................................................................................D20
Calibration Data................................................................................................................................................D32
Zero Ready......................................................................................................................................................D46
MAIN MENU 3..........................................................................................................................................................D47
Changing the Protection Level............................................................................................................................D48
Diagnostics.......................................................................................................................................................D49
Tests...............................................................................................................................................................D56
MAIN MENU 4..........................................................................................................................................................D62
I/O Definition.....................................................................................................................................................D62
Alarms Definition...............................................................................................................................................D76
MAIN MENU 5..........................................................................................................................................................D81
Communication A Scroll.....................................................................................................................................D81
Print.................................................................................................................................................................D86
The PRINT Key.................................................................................................................................................D96
MAIN MENU 6..........................................................................................................................................................D97
Audit Trail.........................................................................................................................................................D98
Linearization...................................................................................................................................................D100
APPENDIX E MT2201 MULTI-POINT CALIBRATION...............................................................................................E1
DEFINE NUMBER OF CALIBRATION POINTS......................................................................................................................E1
SELECTION OF CALIBRATION POINT...............................................................................................................................E2
Digital Input Selection..........................................................................................................................................E3
Linearization.......................................................................................................................................................E3
ADDENDUM A..................................................................................................................................................A1
NEW SCROLL INFORMATION.........................................................................................................................................A3
AXT DURATION.........................................................................................................................................................A3
MATERIAL CALIBRATION..............................................................................................................................................A4
ZERO DATA PRINTING.................................................................................................................................................A4
HIGH AND LOW ALARM................................................................................................................................................A6
LOAD CELL FAILURE ALARM.........................................................................................................................................A6
AUTO ZERO LIMIT ALARM............................................................................................................................................A7
LIST OF TABLES & FIGURES

Table1-1. Symbol Identification ....................................................................................................................... 1-8
Figure 1-1.Speed Sensor Input ..................................................................................................................... 1-13
Figure 1-2. AC Input Module ......................................................................................................................... 1-14
Figure 1-3. DC Input Module ......................................................................................................................... 1-14
Figure 1-4. AC Output Module....................................................................................................................... 1-15
Figure 1-5. DC Output Module ...................................................................................................................... 1-15
Figure 1-6. High-Level Analog Input ............................................................................................................. 1-16
Figure 1-7. High-Level Analog Output........................................................................................................... 1-17
Figure 2-1. Typical Micro-Tech 2201 Installation ........................................................................................... 2-2
Figure 2-2. Electrical and Mounting guidelines Micro-Tech 2000 Model 2201 (Field Mount) Integrator .. 2-3
Figure 2-3. Field Terminal Board..................................................................................................................... 2-7
Figure 2-4. Field Wiring Diagram Field Mount with Terminal Board........................................................... 2-8
Figure 2-5. Electrical and Mounting Guidelines Micro-Tech 2000 Model 2201 (Panel Mount) Integrator 2-9
Figure 2-6. Installation Micro-Tech 2000 Model 2201 (Panel Mount) Integrator ..................................... 2-10
Figure 2-7. Field Wiring diagram Field Mount without Field Terminal Board or Panel Mount................. 2-11
Figure 2-8. Model 2201 Mother Board .......................................................................................................... 2-14
Figure 2-9. Load Cell Premium A/D Board ................................................................................................... 2-17
Figure 2-10. Field Terminal Board................................................................................................................. 2-18
Figure 2-11. Analog I/O Board Depopulated 1 Output .............................................................................. 2-19
Figure 2-12. Analog I/O Board Populated 2 Inputs / 2 Outputs ................................................................ 2-20
Figure 2-13. COMM A Board ......................................................................................................................... 2-23
Model 10-17-4 ................................................................................................................................................ 2-25
Figure 2-14. Belt Scale Weighbridge ............................................................................................................ 2-25
Figure 2-15. Pivot to Load Cell ...................................................................................................................... 2-26
Figure 2-16. Number of Weigh Idlers on Scale Weighbridges(s) - IDN....................................................... 2-27
Figure 2-17. Pivot to 2nd Weigh Idler ............................................................................................................. 2-27
Figure 2-18. Pivot to 2nd Weigh Idler ............................................................................................................. 2-28
Figure 2-19. Pivot 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th Idler .................................................................................................... 2-28
Figure 2-20. Pivot to Test Weight Height ...................................................................................................... 2-29
Figure 2-21. Pivot to Test Weight Length ..................................................................................................... 2-30
Figure 2-22. Pivot to Carriage Height............................................................................................................ 2-30
Figure 2-23. Roll to Carriage Height ............................................................................................................. 2-31
Figure 2-24. Measuring Angle of Incline ....................................................................................................... 2-33
Figure 2-25. Micro-Tech 2201 CPU Board ................................................................................................... 2-34
Figure 3-1. Model 2201 Integrator Front Panel .............................................................................................. 3-2
Table A-1. Weighbridge Physical Parameters ............................................................................................... A-2
Figure A-1. Typical Weighbridges .................................................................................................................. A-3
Table A-2. Rules for Entering the Parameters............................................................................................... A-4
Table A-3. Thermo Fisher Scientific Weighbridges ....................................................................................... A-5
Figure C-1. General Purpose Digital Inputs ................................................................................................... C-1
Figure C-2. General Purpose Fault Output .................................................................................................... C-2
Figure C-3. Digital Input/Output Boards ......................................................................................................... C-4
Figure C-4. Digital Inputs/Outputs .................................................................................................................. C-5
Figure C-5. BCD Input .................................................................................................................................... C-6
Figure Addendum A-1. Micro-Tech Mother Board ........................................................................................ A-2
Chapter 1 Introduction
This instruction manual contains information on the installation, operation, calibration,

and maintenance of the Micro-Tech 2000 Model 2201 Field Mount and Panel Mount
Conveyor Belt Scale Integrator.
Application The Micro-Tech 2201 Field Mount Integrator or Panel Mount Integrator is a micro-
computer driven instrument used for deriving rate and quantity of flowing material from
signals representing the weight of a segment (pounds/foot) of moving material and its
velocity (feet/minute).
By suitable processing of these two input signals, the Integrator delivers visible and
electrical output representing the rate of material movement and visible and electrical
output representing total amount of material which has passed the weighbridge.
For remote indicating, four options are available:
1. Remote totalization.
2. Remote flow rate, belt loading or belt speed.
3. Communications.
4. Field Bus
The Integrator has provisions for three programmable logical inputs, three
programmable logical outputs, and one fault output. In addition to the standard inputs,
optional digital input/output boards can be added.
Many automatic and check functions are available to the operator for calibration and
maintenance.
Thermo Fisher Scientific 1-1

REC-3950 Rev G
Main Features The Model 2201 integrator or panel mount integrator has many hardware and
software features necessary for continuous weighing and outputting totalized weight
and rate information. The main features are listed below. Other features are listed in
specific sections of this manual.
Menu driven scroll entries on a four line display

Five LED status indicators
Visible and electrical outputs representing rate or load of the material
movement
Visible and electrical output representing total amount of material that has
passed the weighbridge
Automatic zero and span calibration
Audit Trail, NTEP requirement
Auto zero tracking
Several software options that may be turned on by keyboard entry or by
installing optional plug-in PC boards
Optically coupled digital inputs and outputs
Alarms and failure detection
Communication standards: RS232C, RS485 networking and multidrop, 20 mA
current loop passive
Allen-Bradley Remote I/O
PROFIBUS-DP
Integrator The standard configuration of the integrator includes one single channel premium
scale A/D board, one single channel current output board and one remote total pulse
Configuration output module.
The NTEP version includes the above boards and output module plus an optional
COMM board for printing and an output module for high/low flow rate alarms.
Four more (three if NTEP) circuit board expansion slots are available. The following
boards can be inserted if the need arises.
Single channel current output board

Dual channel current output, analog input board
16 digital inputs / 4 digital outputs
4 digital inputs / 16 digital outputs
Serial communication board
Allen-Bradley remote I/O board
PROFIBUS-DP board
1-2 Thermo Fisher Scientific

REC-3950 Rev G
Integrator General The integrator has been designed for belt scales, and is capable of performing all the
necessary measuring functions.
Description
All the required functions are resident in the software of the microprocessor. Optional
functions are automatically turned on when the relevant hardware is installed, or after
the operator has selected them through the keyboard. In all cases, there is no need
for special software to be created.
Although the program of the Micro-Tech 2201 is thus very large, the set up of the
instrument is very easy, since it is performed by entering parameters through the
keyboard following the guidelines of comprehensive messages appearing on the four
line display.
The set up parameters may be divided into the following main groups:
Measuring
Monitoring
Printing
Communication
Measuring Functions The integrator can be directly connected to up to six 350 ohm load cells and receives
the signal of a speed sensor in order to calculate belt speed, belt loading and feed
rate.
Rate is integrated in time to calculate the amount of material conveyed by the belt
(total), and is displayed in three individual registers: total, reset total, operator total.
The integrator can perform automatic zero and span calibrations. When the belt is
running and the rate is below a certain percentage, the integrator can perform auto
zero tracking, to minimize the error of zero due to material and dust buildup.
Analog (current) output signals can be generated to transmit rate, speed or belt
loading to other control devices.
Displayed variables and analog outputs can be smoothed via damping filters,
individually programmable.
Monitoring Functions The integrator includes internal diagnostic that will generate alarms in case of
hardware failures or programming errors. The following process alarms are also
provided:
Belt slip
Alarms for high and low flow rate, speed and weight

REC-3950 Rev G
Alarms are visible on the display and can be acknowledged and reset through
keyboard, digital input or serial line. Alarms can be delayed to avoid intervention in
case of short time peaks. Each individual alarm can be programmed to operate as
alarm, shut down or to be ignored. Two LEDs indicate the cumulative status of alarms
and shut-down. Digital outputs are also provided for the following:
Hardware failure
Alarm cumulative
Shut down cumulative
Print Functions Periodical and under command prints can be obtained by connecting a serial printer to
an optional communication board. Time and date are permanently stored in battery
backed memory. The entire set up of the instrument can also be printed out.
Communications 1. Serial Communications

(Optional)
The communication protocol allows a remote intelligent device to read and
eventually write the contents of the registers.
During the communication activity, the Micro-Tech 2201 always acts as a Slave,
meaning it responds to a request from a Master device on the line, but never
attempts to send messages out.
One electrical interface may be selected accessed through one communication

port. Up to three communication boards may be installed.
2. Field Bus I/O
Allen-Bradley Remote or PROFIBUS-DP I/O communication link board is typically

used to transfer I/O images between a main PLC and remote devices (normally
remote I/O racks - rack adapters) or to transfer (read and write blocks of data with
intelligent remote devices (node adapters). The Micro-Tech 2201 in this case.
The Remote I/O is a typical master/slave communication where the main PLC is
the master or scanner and the remote devices are slaves or adapters.

REC-3950 Rev G
Functional
Description
Measuring Functions 1. Instantaneous Flow Rate Calculation
The signal delivered by the load cell(s), which represents the weight per unit
length of the belt (lbs/ft), is multiplied by the signal delivered by the speed
transmitter which represents the belt speed (ft/min). The result of this operation is
the instantaneous flow rate (lbs/ft x ft/min = lbs/min) which is then multiplied by
suitable constant to obtain the value in the required engineering units (kg/h, ton/h,
etc.). An adjustable damping filter is provided separately for displayed rate and
current outputs.
2. Flow Totalization
The total is accumulated by multiplying mass per unit length by incremental length
and totalizing the result in engineering units.
Three totalizing memories are provided:
-The first memory (Master total) cannot be reset to guarantee that the data is not
lost because of an unwanted reset.
-The second and third memories (Reset and Operator total) can be reset by the
operator and normally used for shift or daily totalization.
3. Zero and Span Automatic Calibrations
Zero and span calibrations are based on belt length defined by a number of belt
revolutions.
To calculate the exact number of revolutions, the instrument counts the pulses
delivered by the speed transmitter (one pulse represents a specific belt length);
when the required number of pulses is reached, the instrument ends the
calibration test, and compares the actual totalized value to the theoretical one (0
for zero calibration), and calculates the calibration constant.
The calibration constant is a calculated value that can be factored based on an

actual material test.
-Electronic Calibration (R-Cal)
Allows the operator to perform the calibration without the need of applying test
weights or test chain on the weighbridge. The electronic calibration checks all the
circuitry including the load cell, and is performed by unbalancing the load cell

REC-3950 Rev G
bridge using a precision resistor. The calibration constant is calculated on the
basis of the load cell and the scale data.
-Test Weight Calibration
Requires the positioning of test weights on the weighbridge.
-Chain Calibration
Requires the application of calibrated chains on the belt. This method is the
nearest to actual operating conditions.
-Material Test
Is performed by running a known quantity of material on the scale and weighing

that quantity on a static scale of known accuracy.
4. Multiple Calibration Points
The instrument supports up to 10 different calibrations and linearizations for

systems that use a reversing belt or have multiple feed points. The different
calibration factors calculated compensate for variations in belt tension and effect
on the conveyor belt scale due to the change in loading conditions.
The operator can select which calibration to run by entering the calibration number
on the keypad or by selecting it through input contacts. Internally, the instrument
has 10 tables each for zero calibration, span calibration, and linearization. When
one of the calibration points is selected, its values become active.
5. Zero Tracking (AZT)
Under a preset minimum flow rate when enabled, the instrument makes
subsequent automatic zero calibrations with the following sequence:
-waits for one-half time of the test duration (a solid "Z" will be displayed);
-execution of a zero test (the "Z" will flash);
-performs automatic zero for one test duration;
-continuously repeats above zero calibration as long as feed rate remains below
AZT preset value.
Zero Tracking function is limited to a maximum value of "ZERO LIMIT" that is set
in % in the SET UP Scroll.
If the new zero calculated by Auto Zero tracking function exceeds that value, an
alarm is generated and the new zero is not installed. The reference value for zero
is set every time an Auto Zero or Manual Zero is performed.

REC-3950 Rev G
6. Current Output Signals
The standard instrument is equipped with one current output signal (0-20/4-20
mA). An optional dual channel current output/analog input board is available. The
choice of the signal type is made through the keyboard. Each current output may
be programmed via the keyboard to deliver one of the following signals:
-flow rate
-belt loading
-belt speed
Each output has its own adjustable damping and programmable time or length
delay.
Load Out (Optional) The load out option includes additional hardware designed to make the integrator
control a batch sequence. Once the system has been set up, the operator enters the
load size and gives the start command. All functions are then controlled by the
integrator.
Start and Stop keys on the front panel are operable if the load out option is installed.
The pre-feeder is stopped when the totalized value equals the batch set value minus
the overflow correction value.
The START/STOP commands are provided by external signals (manual push-button

or relay contact from an automatic system). The stop signal is used only in an
emergency to abort the cycle before it ends.
Load sizing can be changed remotely via BCD input.
Monitoring Functions The integrator is equipped with an indication system. Indication can be in the form of:
- status indications
- process alarms
- programming errors
- equipment failures
Unpacking and The Micro-Tech 2201 Integrator has been properly packaged for shipment and
storage, when necessary. Refer to the appropriate manual in the Appendix for
Inspection unpacking procedures for optional equipment.
Inspect all packages for damage before opening as oftentimes the carrier may be
responsible for shipping damage. Refer to the appropriate manual in the Appendix for

REC-3950 Rev G
inspection procedures for optional equipment.
Storage The Micro-Tech 2201 Integrator can be safely stored, with cover latches secured and
hole plugs installed, between -40 to +158 F (-40 to +70 C). The units should be
protected against moisture.
Symbol Table 1-1 below describes the symbols used in this manual.
Identification
Symbol Description
Alternating current
Earth (ground) TEMINAL
PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR TERMINAL
Caution, risk of electric shock
Caution (refer to accompanying documents)
Table1-1. Symbol Identification

REC-3950 Rev G
Specifications Enclosure
Field Mount
NEMA 4X, dust and watertight
Size 15 x 13 x 7 inches
Fiberglass reinforced polyester molded blue
Door window UVA acrylic UL#E64358
Stainless steel "Quick" type latch
2 position mounting feet
Steel chassis providing EMI/RFI shielding
Provision for 7 solid-state input/output modules (4 output, 3 input)
Power on/off switch (field terminal board option)
Panel mount
Size: DIN43700 96 X 288 mm
Enlarged bezel for field mount and U.S. panel mount to allow "dust seal"
Material: chromated mild steel
Environmental Conditions
Mounting
Field Mount: (Indoor/Outdoor) Should be mounted as close to the load cells as
possible and not exposed to excessive vibration, heat, or moisture.
Panel Mount: Control room environment and not exposed to excessive vibration
or heat.
Temperature (Ambient)
Storage: -40 to +158 F (-40 to +70 C)
Operating: +14 to +122 F (-10 to +50 C)
Maximum relative humidity

Maximum relative humidity 80% for temperature up to 31 degree C decreasing
linearly to 50% humidity at 40 degree C.
Pollution degree
2
Altitude
Up to 6,561 ft (2000 m)

REC-3950 Rev G
Power Requirements
Nominal voltage
110/120/220/240 VAC, selectable
Nominal frequency
50/60 Hz
Operating range
Nominal voltage +10%, -15%
93.5 VAC - 121 VAC (110 VAC Nom.)

102.0 VAC - 132 VAC (120 VAC Nom.)
187.0 VAC - 242 VAC (220 VAC Nom.)
204.0 VAC - 264 VAC (240 VAC Nom.)
Fusing
1.0 Amp Slo-Blo 110/120 VAC, Type T
0.50 Amp Slo-Blo 220/240 VAC, Type T
Operating Current
.50/.45/.25/.23 Amps
Maximum non-destructive input voltage

150/300 VAC for 1 minute
Power Switch
Field mount with field terminal board only: switches both L1 and L2.
Transient overvoltage
Installation category (Overvoltage Category II)
AC Power Supply
EMI/RFI protection
110/120/220/240 VAC input selection by means of TWO switches (UL, CSA,
VDE approved) mounted internally.
50/60 Hz transformer
DC Power Supplies
Auxiliary Power Supply Output (Alarm Contacts, etc.)
- Output voltage: +24 VDC +27/-21%

(19.0/30.4)
Unregulated
-Isolation: Yes 500 volts

REC-3950 Rev G
-Output ripple: 1.0 V peak to peak typical
Output current: 600 mA maximum
-Short-circuit protection
Load Cell (Weight)

Load Cell input circuits
Number: Up to SIX 350 ohm load cells in parallel. Cable
distance of 200 ft. or less.
Sensitivity: 0.5 mV/V to 3.5 mV/V (keyboard selectable).
Input impedance: 1 M ohm minimum.
Maximum usable signal: 114% of 3 mV/V.
Displayed A/D counts
for 3 mV/V: 112368
Isolation: Isolated.
Maximum non-destructive
input voltage: 6 V relative to ground.
Transient/RFI protection: YES
Load Cell cable shield: Connected to earth ground.
Load Cell Excitation Power Supply

10 VDC 10%, 220 mA
Minimum load impedance (operating) 58 ohms
Output short circuit, 1.5 A maximum
Excitation-sense circuitry
6 Wire System. Cable distance over 200 ft. (not to exceed 3000 ft.).
Nominal input voltage: 5 VDC (10 volts)
Input impedance: 100 k ohm minimum.
Jumper selectable: Local or remote sense.
Load Cell A/D Converter

A/D converter: 24 bits signal delta A/D more than 1,000,000
counts at 100% load cell capacity using
3 mV/V load cell
Type: Ration metric

REC-3950 Rev G
Speed 10 conversions per second
Zero Thermal Drift: 0.15 V/C
Span Thermal Drift: 4 ppm/C
Speed Input
High speed digital (DC) input
speed sensor (Figure 1-1)
comparator based input with hysteresis
optically isolated
built in current source for dry contact use
powered by +24 V DIO supply or +20 V SPU supply
Type:
Jumper selectable: Voltage/current or contact closure type sensor.
Compatible with all Ramsey speed sensors.
Frequency range:
Voltage/current
type sensor: 0.25 to 2.0 kHz.
Contact closure
type sensor: 0.25 to 30 Hz.
Low threshold: +1.0 VDC min
High threshold: +3.2 VDC max
Low or high
pulse duration: Voltage/current type sensor: 200 us minimum.
Contact closure
type sensor: 15 ms minimum.
Hysteresis: 0.5 VDC minimum.
Input impedance: 10 k ohm typical,

500ohm minimum
Input source
current: -2 mA nom. at 0 VDC
Maximum
non-destructive
input voltage: 50 V peak, continuous.

REC-3950 Rev G
Cable Length: 1 mile, using 18 AWG shielded cable Ramsey
series 60 speed sensors.
Figure 1-1.Speed Sensor Input

REC-3950 Rev G
Mother Board Digital Inputs
The field mount integrator has provision on the field terminal board for three
OPTO 22/Generation 4 modules. The programmable status inputs may be AC or
DC (Figure 1-2 or Figure 1-3).
The panel mount integrator version only accepts a dry contact input. See
Appendix C for specifications and a typical wiring diagram.
Figure 1-2. AC Input Module
Figure 1-3. DC Input Module

REC-3950 Rev G
Mother Board Digital Outputs and Fault Output
The field mount integrator has provision on the field terminal board for four
OPTO 22/Generation 4 modules. Three are programmable and one is a
dedicated fail safe fault output. All outputs may be AC or DC (Figure 1-4 or
Figure 1-5).
Figure 1-4. AC Output Module
Figure 1-5. DC Output Module

REC-3950 Rev G
Analog I/O Board B (Optional)
(2) high level inputs (Figure 1-6)
Type: Differential voltage input.
(0-20 mA or 4-20 mA with internal resistor, jumper selectable)
Range: 0-5 volt, or 5 volt, programmable.
Input impedance: 1 M ohm nominal (differential)
Maximum usable input voltage: 106 % of full-scale
Non-isolated.
Maximum non-destructive input voltage: 12 V peak
Figure 1-6. High-Level Analog Input
2) current outputs (Figure 1-7)

optically isolated
isolated power source
Voltage output by adding an internal dropping resistor.
Output range: User selectable 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA, representing 0 to 100%
variable.
Resistive load: 800 ohms maximum
Capacitive load: no limit

REC-3950 Rev G
+ 2 4 X
+ 1 2 X
Rv 0 - 2 0 / 4 - 2 0 mA
OUT P UT
0 . 0 1
1 2 - BI T
D/ A CONV E RT E R
I C 1
V OL T A GE O UT PUT
0 . 1
X OP T I ONA L BY
I S OL A T E D
A NA L OG OU T ADD I NG " Rv "

X
1 0 K
C O M MO N
9 0 . 9
1 %
A00 701 X
Figure 1-7. High-Level Analog Output
Analog I/O Board A

Depopulated version of Analog I/O B:
(1) high level output
Resistive load: 800 ohm maximum loop
Capacitive load: no limit
Communication Board A
(See Field Wiring Diagram.)
Serial Interface
Type: Conforms to RS-232C, RS-485/422, and 20 mA standards; supports 2 and
4 wire multi-drop in RS-485. 20 mA loop is passive ONLY.
Interfacing: RS-485 supports 2-wire or 4-wire multi-drop networking; RS-232C
provides support for modem.
Data rate: 300 to 19200, operator selectable from the keyboard.
Data format: Asynchronous, bit-serial, selectable parity, data length, and stop bits.
Optical isolation, 250 Vrms max.
Input voltage: 30 Vdc max. (RS-232C)
+15/-10 Vdc max. (RS-485)
Cable length: 50 feet maximum (RS-232C)

REC-3950 Rev G
4000 feet maximum (RS-485 and 20 mA)
Clock Calendar
Type: Dallas DS1285 with battery backup; provisions of clock/calendar with
integrated battery.
Refer to Serial Communications manual (REC3949) if this option is installed.
Allen-Bradley Remote I/O

Refer to Allen-Bradley Remote I/O manual REC 4012 if this option is installed.
PROFIBUS-DP
Refer to PROFIBUS-DP manual REC 4063 if this option is installed.

REC-3950 Rev G
Chapter 2 Installation
This chapter describes the Integrator installation procedure, hardware configuration,

and initial programming. Initial programming is a machine directed procedure
prompting the operator to enter required conveyor and belt scale parameters. After all
parameters have been entered, the integrator performs an unassisted zero and span
calibration.
Field Mount The field mount Integrator should be mounted in a control room environment and not
be exposed to excessive vibration, heat or moisture. The Integrator may be mounted
Installation up to 200 feet from the scale (Figure 2-1).
Mounting Mount the Integrator to a rigid, flat, vertical surface using four mounting holes provided
on the back of the enclosure
(Figure 2-2).
Care should be taken to insure the mounting surface is flat so as not to twist or warp
the fiberglass enclosure when tightening the mounting bolts

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-1. Typical Micro-Tech 2201 Installation

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-2. Electrical and Mounting guidelines Micro-Tech 2000
Model 2201 (Field Mount) Integrator

REC-3950 Rev G
Safety
Precautions
CAUTION. DO NOT INSTALL, OPERATE, OR PERFORM ANY MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES UNTIL YOU HAVE READ THE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS WHICH
FOLLOW.
CAUTION. Do not connect power to the electronics or turn on the unit until
you have read and understood this entire manual. The precautions and
procedures presented in this manual must be followed carefully in order to
prevent equipment damage and protect the operator from possible injury.
CAUTION. Hands and clothing must be kept away from all moving or rotating
parts.
WARNING. Covers over the electronics should always remain in place during
operation. They should be removed only for maintenance procedures with the
machines power OFF. Be sure to replace all covers before resuming
operation.
WARNING. All switches (such as control or power) must be OFF when

checking input AC electrical connections, removing or inserting printed
circuit boards, or attaching voltmeters to the system.
WARNING. Incoming voltages must be checked with a voltmeter before being

connected to the electronics.
WARNING. Extreme caution must be used in testing in, on, or around the
electronics, PC boards, or modules. There are voltages in excess of 115 V or
230 V in these areas. Avoid high voltage and static electricity around the
printed circuit boards.
WARNING. Maintenance procedures should be performed only by qualified

service personnel and in accordance with procedures/instructions given in
this manual..
WARNING. During maintenance, a safety tag (not supplied by Thermo Fisher

Scientific) should be displayed in the ON/OFF switch areas as a precaution
instructing others not to operate the unit.
WARNING. Only qualified service technicians should be allowed to open and

work in the electronics, power supply, control, or switch boxes.

REC-3950 Rev G
WARNING. Objects should never be placed or stored on the integrator.
WARNING. This equipment should not be operated nor utilized in

applications other than those stated in the original order. (To adapt
production rates or applications, consult Thermo Fisher Scientific Products
Customer Service for recommendations.)
WARNING. All panels covering the electronics must be in place and tight
before wash down procedures. Damage to the electronics could result from
water, moisture, or contamination in the electronics housing.
Utility
Connections
(Incoming Power)
CAUTION. DO NOT CONNECT POWER UNTIL YOU HAVE READ AND
UNDERSTOOD THIS ENTIRE SECTION. IMPROPER CONNECTION MAY
RESULT IN DAMAGE TO YOUR INTEGRATOR.
CAUTION. VERIFY THAT THE INPUT VOLTAGE IS CORRECT WITH AN AC

VOLTMETER BEFORE YOU CONNECT IT TO THE INTEGRATOR.
CAUTION. EARTH GROUND MUST BE PROVIDED TO THE INTEGRATOR. DO

NOT USE CONDUIT TO PROVIDE THIS GROUND.
CAUTION. A READILY ACCESSIBLE DISCONNECT DEVICE (MAXIMUM 20

AMP) SHALL BE INCORPORATED IN THE FIELD WIRING. THIS DISCONNECT
DEVICE SHOULD BE IN EASY REACH OF THE OPERATOR AND IT MUST BE
MARKED AS THE DISCONNECTING DEVICE FOR THE EQUIPMENT.
CAUTION. REFER TO THE FIELD WIRING DIAGRAM (Figure 2-4 and Figure 2-
7) AS A GUIDE IF YOU DO NOT HAVE A SPECIFIC WIRING DIAGRAM FOR
YOUR SYSTEM. FOLLOW YOUR LOCAL ELECTRONIC CODES AND
REGULATIONS FOR MINIMUM WIRE SIZE AND ROUTING.
Wiring 1. Critical wiring conditions:

a) Insure power is off.
b) Do not route load cell and signal cables in the same conduit with power
cables or any large source of electrical noise.
REC-3950 Rev G
c) Earth ground all enclosures and conduits. A ground connection between
all conduits is required.
d) Wiring should be long enough to allow the field terminal entry panel to
swing down for circuit board access.
e) Connect the shields ONLY where shown.
f) Check that all wires are tight in their connections.
g) Never use a "megger" to check the wiring.
h) A readily accessible disconnect device (maximum 20 amps) shall be
incorporated in the field wiring. This disconnect should be in easy reach of
the operator and it must be marked as the disconnecting device for the
equipment.
i) All conduits should enter the bottom of the enclosure. Do not run conduit
through the top or sides of the enclosure.
2. To connect incoming power, use the following procedure (see Figure 2-2).
NOTE: All units shipped from the factory are configured for 120 VAC. If
another input selection is desired.
a) Rotate the screw latch mounted on the lower left corner of the front
chassis counter-clockwise. Open the door.
b) Route incoming power wiring through a conduit hole at the bottom right of
the enclosure (see Figure 2-2). Leave ample loose wiring (typically 8") to
facilitate any movement of the field terminal board.
c) Wire safety ground terminal located on the side of the chassis.
d) Wire HOT to H on TB7 (see Figure 2-4 and Figure 1-4).
e) Wire NEUTRAL to N on TB7.
f) If additional I/O is required at line voltages, these wires should be routed
through a conduit hole on the bottom right of the enclosure (see Figure 2-
2). Leave ample loose wiring (typically 8") to facilitate any movement of
the field terminal board.
g) All additional field wiring operation at voltages less than 30 V must be
located on the left bottom of the enclosure (see Figure 2-2). Leave ample
loose wiring (typically 8") to facilitate any movement of the field terminal
board.
h) Close the front chassis cover and rotate the screw lock on the lower left
corner counter-clockwise until locked. Verify the door is locked.

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-3. Field Terminal Board

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-4. Field Wiring Diagram Field Mount with Terminal Board

REC-3950 Rev G
Panel Mount The panel mounted Integrator suitable for mounting in a control panel. The control
panel should not be exposed to excessive vibration, heat or moisture. The front
Installation bezel, when properly seated, forms a dust seal.
A two (2) inch clearance around the top and bottom of the Integrator is required for
convection cooling. Additional clearances may be required if equipment mounted
directly below generates excessive heat. Clearance in the back is necessary for
wiring access and fuse replacement. Clearance on the side is necessary for
inserting the chassis holding brackets from the back after insertion of the
Integrator.
Mounting Provide a cutout in the panel and insert the Integrator after removing the holding
brackets (see Figure 2-5 and Figure 2-6). From the back, insert the holding
brackets on both sides of the Integrator. Tighten the holding brackets to support
the Integrator and form the dust seal.
Figure 2-5. Electrical and Mounting Guidelines Micro-Tech 2000

Model 2201 (Panel Mount) Integrator

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-6. Installation Micro-Tech 2000 Model 2201 (Panel
Mount) Integrator
NOTE:
1. See Figure 2-5 for panel cutout and outline and mounting dimensions.
2. The large rubber band shipped with the unit can be used to hold clamp
brackets in place during installation.
3. Remove clamp brackets and slide chassis assembly through front of cut-
out. Re-install clamp brackets into chassis and tighten threaded rods
against back of panel until unit is secure.
Covers over the electronics should always remain in place during operation. They
should be removed only for maintenance procedures with the machines power
OFF. Be sure to replace all covers before resuming operation.

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-7. Field Wiring diagram Field Mount without Field
Terminal Board or Panel Mount

REC-3950 Rev G
Wiring 1. Some critical wiring considerations:
Insure power is off.
a. Do not route load cell and signal cables in the same conduit with power
cables or any large source of electrical noise.
b. Wiring should be long enough, and routed to allow the chassis to be
removed from the front for servicing if necessary.
c. Connect the shields ONLY where shown.
d. Check that all wires are tight in their connections.
e. Earth ground all enclosures and conduit.
f. Never use a "megger" to check the wiring.
g. A readily accessible disconnect device (maximum 20 amps) shall be
incorporated in the field wiring. This disconnect should be in easy reach of
the operator and it must be marked as the disconnecting device for the
equipment.
2. To connect incoming power, use the following procedure (see Figure 2-7).
NOTE: All units shipped from the factor are configured for 120 VAC. If another
input selection is desired, refer to Mother Board Configuration Jumpers and
Switches.
a. For input power, use 14 AWG stranded wire.

b. Wire the safety ground terminal located on the right back side of the
enclosure.
c. Wire the HOT to terminal labeled HOT.
d. Wire the NEUTRAL to the terminal labeled NEUTRAL.
Integrator The Micro-Tech 2201 is one of a family of products that is supported by a common
hardware platform. Configuration of the hardware platform and additional circuit
Configuration boards enable the hardware platform to be used for several discrete instruments.
Wire jumpers are installed at the factory for the instrument ordered, and should not
have to be reconfigured in the field.
Switches and removable jumpers are described in this section. The default position is
noted in each description and, in most cases, is not changed.
Mother Board
Configuration
Jumpers and
Switches

REC-3950 Rev G
CAUTION. TO BE PERFORMED BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL ONLY.
1. AC voltage input power selection SW1 and SW2 are located on the right center
section of the mother board (see
Figure 2-8).
AC INPUT FUSE SW1 SW2

VOLTAGE F1 (SB SETTING SETTING
110 1.0 A 110 110/220
Default 120 1.0 A 110 120/240
220 0.5 A 220 110/220
240 0.5 A 220 120/240
First, set SW1 for nominal 110 VAC or 220 VAC. Next, set SW2 close to the
actual input voltage.
Example: Input Voltage = 117 VAC
SW1 = 110
SW2 = 120/240
2. General Purpose Digital Inputs
Located on the Field Terminal board are provisions for three programmable
status input optional OPTO/22 plug-in modules. The programmable inputs may
be configured as normally open or normally closed. External AC or DC power for
input logic is required.

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-8. Model 2201 Mother Board
External Alarm 1
External Alarm 2
External Alarm 3
Print
Belt Running
Reset Total
Reset Alarm
Auto Zero
Clip Detector
Batch Start Command
Batch Stop Command
Batch Standby Command
Calibration Select 1....10

REC-3950 Rev G
Any three inputs may be selected. An optional AC or DC OPTO/22 module is
required for each input.
3. Digital Outputs
Located on the Mother board are provisions for four programmable output
OPTO/22 plug-in modules. Three digital outputs are programmable and the
fourth one is permanently assigned as integrator fault. The three programmable
digital outputs may be configured as normally open or normally closed. The fault
output is normally closed and cannot be reconfigured or used as a programmable
output. External AC or DC power is required for all external devices wired to the
output modules. One OPTO/22 AC output module is included for remote
totalization.
The programmable output choices are:
Alarm Cumulative
Shutdown Cumulative
Ready
High Load
Low Load
High Rate
Low Rate
High Speed
Low Speed
Totalization Pulse (Remote Counter)
Batch Preset Reach
Batch End
Print Ready
Load WTS (Weights)
Out of Range
Deviation Alarms

REC-3950 Rev G
Field Terminal The field terminal board is not available on the panel mount version. An optional
solid-state module rack is required to interface with the panel mount version when
Board
solid-state modules are required (see Figure 2-11).
(Field Mount Only)
NOTE: You must choose between wiring dry contact inputs and open collector
outputs direct or through the solid-state relay module options. the two options
cannot be mixed.
A/D Board Jumpers 1. Load Cell Sensor
Load cell sense is controlled by selectable jumpers OP1 and OP2 located on the
lower left corner of the premium A/D board located in Mother board slot #6
(Figure 2-10). The jumpers should be in position "A" local sense if the distance is
less than 200 feet between load cell and integrator.
For distances greater than 200 feet and less than 3,000 feet, the jumper should
be in position "B". A special 6 wire cable is required. Refer to the field wiring
drawing for jumper requirement in the scale junction box.
JUMPERS
Mode OP1 OP2
Less than 200 feet "A" "A" [Default]
Greater than 200 feet "B" "B"

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-9. Load Cell Premium A/D Board

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-10. Field Terminal Board

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-11. Analog I/O Board Depopulated 1 Output

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-12. Analog I/O Board Populated 2 Inputs / 2 Outputs

REC-3950 Rev G
Analog Input/Output The optional analog input/output board is available in two configurations described
below: (A) has one current output only; whereas, (B) has two analog inputs and two
Board
current outputs (Figure 2-12). The analog inputs are normally configured for current
with a 250 ohm resistor installed across each input. For use with a 0-5 VDC input,
shunts W3 (input #1) or W4 (input #2) must be cut. The Micro-Tech 2201 can
support up to four current outputs. Four outputs require two (B) analog boards.
No configuration switches or jumpers exist on the current output board.
The integrator is supplied with a type (A) one current output only board located in
Mother board slot #5. An additional Type A or Type B board can be added at any
time.
Type A One user definable 0-20/4-20 or 20-4/10 mA output

Rate
Speed
Load
Type B Two 5 VDC differential inputs and two user definable 0-
20/4-20 or 20-4/20-0 mA outputs (options)
Inputs
Incline Compensation
Moisture Compensation
Outputs
Rate
Speed, or
Load
Communications The communication protocol allows a remote intelligent device to read and
eventually write the contents of the registers.
Board Configuration
During the communication activity, the Micro-Tech 2201 always acts as Slave,
meaning it responds to a request from a Master device on the line, but never
attempts to send messages out.
The instrument reads the message and looks for the address, which is contained
into an address byte in the query package. The message is then processed only if
the address contained in the message matches the address specified in the set up
data of the instrument.
The clock/calendar is located on the communication board. During AC losses or

power off, RAM data retention and operation of the clock/calendar is provided by the
battery located on the mother board.
One electrical interface may be selected accessed through one communication port.
Up to three communication boards may be installed.

REC-3950 Rev G
See REC 3949 Serial Communication manual for protocols and printer information.
Below is a table which summarizes the jumper positions required for selection of
each electrical interface mode.
Jumpers
Mode OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6
RS-232 A A A A A B
RS-485 B A B B A B (Default)
RS-mA B B A A A C
TABLE MDP TABLE TRM

FOR RS-485 ONLY FOR RS-485 ONLY
OP5 OP6
A NORMAL A TERMINATED
B MULTI-DROP B NOT TERMINATED

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-13. COMM A Board

REC-3950 Rev G
Initial Setup Following mechanical and electrical installation, it is necessary that you program field
data that is specific to your application into the Micro-Tech 2201 Integrator memory.
Procedure The following setup procedure should be completed before calibration of your belt
scale is attempted. Refer to Chapter 3 of this manual if more details or assistance are
necessary.
Determining Before turning on the conveyor belt or applying power to the belt scale system, it is
necessary to complete the following statements (see Figure 2-14). Refer to your
Installation
System Data Sheet in the front of your belt scale manual.
Parameters
1. Scale Capacity
Determine the scale's capacity in tons per hour and record the capacity below.
(Example: 400.0)
__________ (Tons Per Hour)
2. Belt Scale Code Number
Determine the belt scale's code number from the System Data Sheet located in
front of the scale manual or see Appendix A/1, Weighbridge Parameters. Record
the code number below. (Example: code number forty-nine (49) is a belt scale
model 10-14, 4 idler.) Enter 0 for any weighbridge not found in the table.
__________ (Belt Scale Code Number)
Entering the code number enters a list of default parameters for the weighbridge
selected. During initial programming, the Integrator calculates a calibration
constant for R-Cal based on the default values. If test weights or test chains are
used, their weight values are entered in the Cal Data Scroll after initial
programming is completed.
During initial programming, DETAIL can be selected after entering the belt scale
code number. All weighbridge default values can be viewed by scrolling down. A
parameter can be changed at this time if necessary.
NOTE: Entering code 0 or selecting DETAIL requires all measurements in the

following Steps 3 through 14 to be made when applicable and entered during
initial programming.

REC-3950 Rev G
Model 10-17-4
Figure 2-14. Belt Scale Weighbridge
3a. Pivot to Load Cell (LA)

3b. Idlers Number (IDN)
3c. Pivot to 1 degree idler (LB1)
3d. Pivot to 2 degree idler (LB2)
3e. Pivot to 3 degree idler (LB3)
3f. Pivot to 4 degree idler (LB4)
3g. Pivot to 5 degree idler (LB5)
3h. Pivot to 6 degree idler (LB6)
4. Pivot to Test Weight Length (LC)
5. Pivot to Test Weight Height (LE)
8. Idler Spacing (LD)
6. Pivot to Carriage Height (LF)
7. Carry Roll to Carriage Height (LG)
9. Conveyors Angle (0)

REC-3950 Rev G
3. Belt Scale Weighbridge Dimensions. Refer to Figure 2-14 and the sketches
below for measurements.
a. Pivot to Load Cell - LA
NOTE: For Model 10-14 weighbridge, record step 3b only and then skip to
Steps 8 through 14.
As indicated on Figure 2-15, measure the distance from the pivot center
line to the load cell center line to the nearest 0.032 (1/32)". Record the
distance below. (Example: 32.00)
__________" (Pivot to Load Cell Distance)
Figure 2-15. Pivot to Load Cell

REC-3950 Rev G
b. Number of Weigh Idlers on Scale Weighbridge(s) - IDN (Figure 2-16)
__________ (Number of Weigh Idlers)
Figure 2-16. Number of Weigh Idlers on Scale Weighbridges(s) -

IDN
c. Pivot to 1st Idler (Weigh Idler) - LB1
line to the weigh idler's center line to the nearest 0.032 (1/32)". Record
the distance below. (Example: 24.00)
__________" (Pivot to Weigh Idler Distance)
(Model 10-20 belt scale shown.)
Figure 2-17. Pivot to 2nd Weigh Idler

REC-3950 Rev G
d. Pivot to 2nd Weigh Idler (Optional)
line to the second weigh idler's center line to the nearest 0.032 (1/32)".
Record the distance below. (Example: 24.00)
__________" (Pivot to 2nd Weigh Idler Distance)
(Model 10-22 belt scale, 10-17-2 similar.)
Figure 2-18. Pivot to 2nd Weigh Idler
NOTE: Up to six (6) weigh idlers on a single weighbridge may be entered

during programming. Measure and record the same as step d above for each
additional weigh idler.
e. Pivot to 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th Idler (Weigh Idler)
As indicated on Figure, measure the distance from the pivot center line to
the weigh idler's center line to the nearest 0.032 (1/32)". Record the
distance below. (Example: 24.00)
__________" (Pivot to Weigh Idler Distance)
(Model 10-17-4 belt scale shown.)
Figure 2-19. Pivot 1st, 2nd, 3rd and 4th Idler

REC-3950 Rev G
NOTE: Complete Steps 4, 5, 6 and 7 below only if test weights are used for
calibration.
f. Pivot to Test Weight Height LE
Measure the distance from the centerline of the pivot to the actual point of
test weight contact to the nearest 0.032 (1/32) inch (Figure 2-20). Record
the distance below. If the contact point is below the pivot, the value is
negative (-).
(Example: 0.00) If test weights are not used, disregard this measurement.
__________" (Pivot to Test Weight Height Distance)
Figure 2-20. Pivot to Test Weight Height
4. Pivot to Test Weight Length LC
Measure the distance from the centerline of the pivot to the actual point
of test weight contact to the nearest 0.032 (1/32) inch. Record the
distance below.
(Example: 4.75) If test weights are not used, disregard this

measurement.
__________" (Pivot to Test Weight Length Distance)

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-21. Pivot to Test Weight Length
5. Pivot to Carriage Height LF
Measure the distance from the centerline of the pivot to the top of the
carriage rails to the nearest 0.032 (1/32) inch. Record the distance below.
(Example: 6.50)
__________" (Pivot to Carriage Height Distance)
Figure 2-22. Pivot to Carriage Height
6. Roll to Carriage Height LG
Measure the distance from the top of the carriage rails to the top of the
weigh idler carry roll where the belt makes contact on trough idlers. Flat
idlers measure to the centerline of the grease fitting to the nearest 0.032
(1/32) inch. Record the distance below. (Example: 6.50)
__________" (Roll to Carriage Height Distance)

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-23. Roll to Carriage Height
7. Number of Load Cells
Enter the number of load cells. (Example: 1)
__________ (Number of Load Cells)
8. Idler Spacing Scale Area LD
Measure the distances between the center lines of all idlers from the
plus 1 (+1) to the minus 1 (-1) idler on both sides of the conveyor (left
and right). Add all the measurements together and divide by the number
of measurements to determine the average distance.
NOTE: If the distances measured are not all equal within 0.032 (1/32) the
scale is not properly installed. Refer to the belt scale installation manual
provided.
__________" (Idler Spacing)
9. Conveyor's Angle of Incline
Measure the conveyor's angle of incline to the nearest 0.1 degrees.

Record the degree of angle below. (Example: 16.0) See Figure 2-24 for
more information on how to measure angle of incline.
__________ degrees (Angle of Conveyor Incline)
10. Load Cell Capacity
From the belt scale data sheet located in the front of its manual,
determine the load cell size in pounds. Record the weight below.
(Example: 250.0)
__________ pounds (Load Cell Weight)

REC-3950 Rev G
11. Load Cell Sensitivity
From the load cell name plate, determine the load cell sensitivity in
mV/V. Record the sensitivity below. (Example 3.000 mV/V)
__________ (Load Cell Sensitivity)
12. Load Cell Resistance
Measure the signal (output) resistance of each load cell with a digital
VOM. Record the resistance below. (Example: 350.000)
__________ (Load Cell Resistance)
13. Conveyor Belt Length
Using a long tape measure, measure the length of one complete belt
revolution. Measure to the nearest 0.1 foot. Record the length below.
(Example: 1000.0)
__________ feet (Conveyor Belt Length)
14. R-Cal Resistance
Record which R-Cal resistors are installed on the A/D circuit board
(refer to Figure 2-9).
R-Cal1 (value) __________ (49.9 k_)

R17 (value) __________ (165.0 k_)
NOTE: If both resistors are installed, the R-Cal value will be the parallel
resistance (38313 ohms).

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-24. Measuring Angle of Incline
Choose a convenient distance _AB_ and measure it in inches.
Hang a plumb line from _B_.
Measure the horizontal distance from _A_ to plumb line in inches (_AC_). Divide
_AC_ by _AB_ to get COS.
If angle of incline in degrees is known, use the following table.
Angle Cos Angle Cos Angle Cos

0 1.0000 6 .9945 12 .9781
1 .9998 7 .9925 13 .9744
2 .9994 8 .9903 14 .9703
3 .9986 9 .9877 15 .9659
4 .9976 10 .9848 16 .9613
5 .9962 11 .9816 17 .9563
Programming the When power is first applied to the Integrator, the system steps the operator
through menus and options that bring the system to a weighing state. Soft keys,
Micro-Tech 2201
numeric keys and the scroll control keys are used to select choices. The RUN and
Integrator MENU control keys are inactive during this procedure.
CAUTION: Inside the Integrators front panel are two voltage selection slide
switches (see Figure 2-25). Ensure they are in the correct position - either
110/120 or 220/240 VAC - before applying power or equipment damage will
occur. See Integrator Configuration.
1. Turn the belt scale conveyor belt on. Run the conveyor empty during setup
and calibration.

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure 2-25. Micro-Tech 2201 CPU Board
2. Programming the Integrator
The programming mode begins the first time power is applied. Information
requested by the instructional screens should be entered before moving to the
next screen. The belt scale is calibrated at the end of this procedure provided the
correct information is entered. The alarm light flashes during the programming
procedure and clears when calibration is complete.
The programming mode begins with the following instructional screens.
- MEMORY ERASED -
Choose the language
key to continue to
ESP USA
The Micro-Tech 2000 is a dual language instrument. USA is always the first
language. The standard configuration provides Spanish (ESP) as the second
language. Other languages, such as German (GER), are available upon request
(consult factory). Press the desired language.

REC-3950 Rev G
Initial scale setup
and calibration.
Press down SCROLL.
Press the DOWN SCROLL key.
Press key under HELP

for more information HELP is flashing
HELP
Press the HELP soft key.
Key with dot (soft

key) performs action
of word above it.
MORE RETURN
When RETURN is pressed, the user is returned to the previous screen. Pressing
MORE advances the system to the next screen.
Press the MORE key.
Use down SCROLL key

to advance through
the menus.
MORE RETURN
Pressing MORE or RETURN reverts the screen back to previous screens in this
series.
Press the DOWN scroll key.
3. Press SCROLL DOWN key to accept the default unit, or CHOICES soft key to
scroll selections. Press ENTER to confirm your selection. Scroll down.

REC-3950 Rev G
- DISPLAY SCROLL 1 -
Measure units
> English <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: ENGLISH
ENGLISH, METRIC, MIXED
If English, all units in English
Selections: If Metric, all units in Metric
If Mixed, units may be a combination of English and Metric
NOTE: If the Measure units are changed from English to Metric (or vice versa)
after the scale is calibrated, the span number will change but the calibration
will remain the same.
4. The units to be used for totalization are selected here. Press ENTER soft key to
accept the default unit, or CHOICES soft key to scroll selections. Press ENTER
to confirm your selection. Scroll down.
Totalization Units
> Tons <
CHOICE ENTER
If ENGLISH: Default: Tons

Selections: Tons, LTons, Pounds
If METRIC: Default: tonnes
Selections: tonnes, kg
If MIXED: Default: Tons
Selections: Tons, LTons, kg, Pounds, tonnes
5. Units used for parameters expressed in length are selected here. Selections are
only available if MIXED units are in use. Press ENTER soft key to accept the
default unit, or CHOICES soft key to scroll selections. Press ENTER to confirm
your selection. Scroll down.

REC-3950 Rev G
Length Units
> feet <
CHOICE ENTER
If ENGLISH: Default: Feet

If METRIC: Default: meters
If MIXED Default: Feet
Selections: Feet, meters
6. The rate is displayed according to the units selected here. Press ENTER soft key
to accept the default unit, or CHOICES soft key to scroll selections. Press
ENTER to confirm your selection. Scroll down.
- DISPLAY SCROLL 4-
Rate Units
> TH <
CHOICE ENTER
If ENGLISH: Default: TPH

Selections: TPH, LTPH, Lb/mn, LT/mn, Percent %, Lb/h
If METRIC: Default: kg/h
Selections: t/h, jg/m, t/m, Percent %, kg/h
If MIXED Default: TPH
Selections: TPH, LTPH, kg/m, t/m, Lb/m, t/mn, Percent %,
kg/h, t/h, Lb/h
7. The units used for entering the load cell capacity are specified here. In this
particular case, the use of English or Metric units is always allowed, even if
MIXED is not specified. Press ENTER soft key to accept the default unit, or
CHOICES soft key to scroll selections. Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
Scroll down.

REC-3950 Rev G
Load cell Units
Pounds <
CHOICE ENTER
If ENGLISH: or Mixed Default: Pounds

If METRIC: Default: kilograms
Selections: Lbs, kg
8. The next entry is the scale capacity, which is the maximum rate at which the
scale is allowed to work. This entry also defines the default number of decimal
places that are used for displaying rate. Use numeric keys for entering the
number, confirm with ENTER. Scroll down.
- SC DATA SCROLL 1 -
Max. scale capacity
500.0 TPH
ENTER
Default: 500.0
Min: 1
Max: 200000
9. When the Scale capacity is entered, the number of decimal places is also
defined. If, for example, the User enters 500.0, this sets the "Scale Divisions"
parameter to 0.1. Advancing to the next scroll, the User then sees first the Scale
Division corresponding to the just entered Scale Capacity (in the example 0.1). If
required, the User is able to alter the Scale Division to any of the available
options.
Press the ENTER soft key to accept the default divisions, or the CHOICES soft
key to scroll selections. Press ENTER to confirm your selection. Scroll down.

REC-3950 Rev G
Scale division
> 0.1 U <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: 0.1
Min: 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.001, 0.002,
0.005
10. Selecting the Weighbridge Model
By entering the code number of your Thermo Fisher Scientific scale on the next
screen, the Integrator automatically calculates parameters of the system such
as number of load cells and number of weigh idlers. This entry is also used for
internal calibration calculations. The default model number is 49, which
corresponds to belt scale model 10-14-4.
Belt scale code #
> 49
ENTER DETAIL
Default: 49
Min: 0
Max: 500
Press ENTER to accept the displayed selection from the database listed in
Appendix A, Weighbridge Parameters. If ENTER is used, the scrolls from 3A to 3J
are not displayed. Skip to Step 12.
Press DETAIL if you want to force the following scrolls #3A to 3O to be displayed
even if ENTER was used.
Enter 0 if you want to define the weighbridge not using the database. This should
only be done for special weighbridges that are not part of the standard set of
Thermo Fisher Scientific scales. Entering 0 forces the following scrolls 3A to 3O to
be displayed.

REC-3950 Rev G
11. Detailing the Mechanical Parameters of the Frame
The following screens are only displayed if OTHER or DETAIL were pressed.
Refer to Figure 2-14.
Parameter LA: pivot to Load Cell distance: The distance from pivot to load
cell should be measured to within 0.032 (1/32) inch (1 mm).
Using the numeric keys, enter the distance recorded and press ENTER. For
weighbridges which do not have a pivot, enter zero.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3A -
Pivot to load cell
distance: 000.00 IN
ENTER
If ENGLISH or MIXED: If METRIC:
Default: 32 in Default: 1000 mm

Min: 0.00 in Min: 0 mm
Max: 150.00 in Max: 3800 mm
This is the number of weigh idlers affixed to the scale weighbridge.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3B -
# of weigh idlers
1
ENTER
Default: 1
Min: 1
Max: 6
Parameter LB1: Pivot to first weigh idler distance. Measure the distance
between the pivot centerline and first weigh idler center line. Enter the distance
(within 0.032 inch or 1 mm) recorded. For weighbridges which do not have a
pivot, enter zero.

REC-3950 Rev G
- SC DATA SCROLL 3C -
Pivot to 1st idler
Distance 000.00 In
ENTER
Default 24 in Default: 800 mm

Max: 100.00 in Max: 2500 mm
If the number of weigh idlers entered in scroll 3B is more than one, the following
screens are displayed. Measure the distance between the pivot centerline and
second weigh idler center line. Enter the distance (within 0.032 inch or 1 mm)
recorded. For weighbridges which do not have a pivot, enter zero.
Only if # of weigh idlers >=2:
- SC DATA SCROLL 3D -
Pivot to 2nd idler
distance 000.00 IN
ENTER
Default: 0.00 In Default: 0 mm

Max: 100.00 in Max: 2500 mm
- SC DATA SCROLL 3E -
Pivot to 3rd idler
distance 000.00 In
ENTER

REC-3950 Rev G

Max: 100.00 in Max: 2500 mm
- SC DATA SCROLL 3F -
Pivot to 4th idler
distance 000.00 In
ENTER

Max: 100.00 in Max: 2500 mm
- SC DATA SCROLL 3G -
Pivot to 5th idler
distance 000.00 In
ENTER

Max: 100.00 in Max: 2500 mm
Only if # of weigh idlers =6:

REC-3950 Rev G
- SC DATA SCROLL 3H -
Pivot to 6th idler
distance 000.00 In
ENTER

Max: 100.00 in Max: 2500 mm
NOTE: All measurements must be (within 0.032 inch or 1 mm) recorded in

Determining Installation Parameters. Enter the distance with the numeric keys
and press ENTER.
Parameter LE: Pivot to test-weight height. For weighbridges which do not

have a pivot, enter zero. 3I, L, M and N only apply if test weights are provided
for calibration.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3I -
Pivot to test-weight
height 000.00 In
ENTER +/-
Default: 0.00 In Default: 0.0 mm

Min: - 20.00 in Min: - 500.0 mm
Max: + 20.00 in Max: + 500.0 mm
Parameter LC: Pivot to test-weight length. For weighbridges which do not

have a pivot, enter zero.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3L -
Pivot to test-weight
length 000.00 In
ENTER

REC-3950 Rev G
Parameter LF: Pivot to carriage height. For weighbridges which do not have a
pivot, enter zero.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3M -
Pivot to carriage
height 000.00 In
ENTER
Default: 6.50 in Default: 0 mm

0.00 in 0.00 in Min: 0 mm
Max: 10.00 in Max: 250 mm
Parameter LG: Carry roll to carriage height. Measure to the center line of the
weigh idler carry roll on troughing idlers, and to the top of the carry roll on flat
belts. For weighbridges which do not have a pivot, enter zero.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3N -
Roll to carriage
height 000.00 In
ENTER

Enter the number of load cells of your weighbridge.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3O -
# of load cells
1
ENTER
Default: 1
Min: 1

REC-3950 Rev G
Max: 6
12. Defining Dimensional Parameters of the Application

Parameter LD: Idler spacing in scale area. For better accuracy, average the
distance between the idlers across the scale on both sides. Measure to within
0.032 inch or 1 mm with the numeric keys and press ENTER.
Idler spacing
36.00 In
ENTER
Default: 36.00 in Default: 1000mm

Max: 120.00 in Max: 2500 mm
Enter the angle of inclination of the belt conveyor. If an inclination

compensator is connected to the scale, after this preliminary set up has been
completed, enable the automatic angle detection in I/O definition (Main Menu 4)
and calibrate the incline compensator.
Conveyors angle
0.0 Degrees
ENTER +/-
Default: 0.00
Min: - 25.00 degrees
Max: + 25.00 degrees
13. Defining the Load Cell(s)
Enter the load cell capacity as it appears on the label placed on the load cell.

REC-3950 Rev G
Load cell capacity
250 Lbs
ENTER
Default: 250.0 Lbs Default: 100 kg

Min: 1 Lbs Min: 1 kg
Max: 15000 Lbs Max: 5000 kg
The sensitivity was entered when the belt scale code was entered. If other (0)
was selected, enter the load cell sensitivity in mV/V as marked on the label of
the load cell.
Load cell sens.
3.000 mV/V
ENTER
Default: 3.000 mV/V

Min: 0.500 mV/V
Load cell resistance is entered on this screen. The resistance for the load cell
has been recorded on the System Data Sheet in the front of your belt scale
manual. (It is also stamped on the load cell cable.) Enter the ohms for the load
cell. The number of scrolls depends on the number of load cells specified in
scroll 3O.
Load cell #1 res
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
Default: 350 Ohms

Min: 10 Ohms
Max: 2000 Ohms

REC-3950 Rev G
If # of Load cells is 2 or more:
Load cell #2 res
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
Same default and limits of load cell #1.
Load cell #3 res
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
If # of load cells is 4 or more:
Load cell #4 res
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
If # of load cells is 5 or more:
Load cell #5 res
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
If # of load cells is 6:

REC-3950 Rev G
Load cell #6 res
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
14. Defining the Speed Input
The speed input screen allows the operator to select either the single speed
sensor input (default value), the double speed input (to provide extra safety
against speed sensor failure) or a simulated value using an internal timer.
Simulation allows operation without a speed sensor. When simulated speed is

selected, a conveyor running input is required (refer to the field wiring diagram).
NOTE: If SPEED is selected as the third line display, the line will be blank in
RUN mode when simulated speed is selected.
Speed input
> single <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: SINGLE
Selections: SINGLE, DUAL, SIMULATED
15. Defining the Calibration Test Duration
Zero and Span calibrations are more accurate if executed on an entire belt
revolution or multiple of it. Press either ACQUIRE or MANUAL, ACQUIRE is the
recommended selection. For MANUAL, see Step 18.

REC-3950 Rev G
- CAL DATA SCROLL 11 -
Establish test
duration
ACQUIRE MANUAL
Select ACQUIRE. Acquire is the recommended selection.
a. Acquiring the Test Duration
When selecting FULL, use a 100 foot tape to measure the belt length to the
nearest 0.1 foot. Reference a fixed point (an idler) on the conveyor when
counting belt revolutions. See Determining Installation Parameters for the
recorded conveyor belt length.
The PARTIAL (belt length measurement) selection enables the operator to

acquire test duration without the entire belt length measurement.
- ACQUIRE TEST DUR -

Choose belt length
measurement method.
FULL PARTIAL
FULL is the recommended selection.
If FULL is selected, continue with Step 16 below. If PARTIAL is selected, skip to

Step 17.
16. Full Test Duration Acquisition
If FULL is pressed, the operator is asked to enter the length of one belt
revolution. Measure belt length to the nearest 0.1 feet.
Enter length of one

belt revolution.
length 1000.0 fT
ENTER ABORT
Default: 1000.0 Ft Default: 200.0 m

REC-3950 Rev G
Min: 1.0 Ft Min: 05 m
Max: 10000.0 Ft Max: 3000 m
After the length of the belt has been entered, the system automatically moves to
the following screen which prompts the operator to press START when the mark
passes the reference point. Pressing ABORT returns the screen to Cal Data
Scroll 11.
The belt must be running at the maximum speed before executing this function.
If not, the pre-scaler will be improperly calculated.
Start belt. Press

START when 1st mark
passes reference.
START ABORT
When START is pressed above, the system automatically moves to the next
instructional screen. The operator presses COUNT each time the mark passes
the reference point until minimum test load conditions are met (refer to belt scale
installation manual for minimum test load requirements). When the last
revolution passes the mark, the operator must press COUNT followed by
pressing DONE.
Pressing ABORT returns the screen to Cal Data Scroll 11.
Zero Cal light illuminates indicating zero calibration is in progress.
Press COUNT each

time a mark passes.
00000 secs 000 revs
COUNT ABORT DONE

When duration test is finished, the new values for length of belt and time are
displayed. Press CONTINUE.
During the Acquire Test Duration, the Integrator performed an unassisted zero
calibration and installed the new zero. Skip to Step 19.

REC-3950 Rev G
TEST DURATION
Length = 0000.0 Ft
Time = 000 sec
CONTINUE
17. Partial Test Duration Acquisition
CAUTION: THIS OPTION SHOULD ONLY BE USED WHEN BELT LENGTH

EXCEEDS 1000 FEET.
If PARTIAL is pressed, the operator is asked to enter the length between two
marks on the belt.
Use a 100 ft. tape to measure the largest possible amount of the belt to the
nearest .01 ft. Locate and mark a reference point on the conveyor (an idler).
Enter length between

two marks on belt.
Length: 200.0 Ft
ENTER ABORT
Default: 300 Ft Default: 50.0 m

Min: 1.0 Ft Min: 0.5 m
Max: 10000.0 Ft Max: 3000.0 m
passes the reference point.
The belt must be running at the maximum speed before executing this function.
If not, the pre-scaler is improperly calculated.

REC-3950 Rev G
Start belt. Press
START when 1st mark
passes reference
START ABORT
When START is pressed above, the system automatically moves to the next
instructional screen. Press COUNT when each mark passes the reference point
until both marks have passed. Then press DONE.
Zero Cal light illuminates indicating zero calibration in progress.
Press COUNT each

time a mark passes.
00000 secs 000 revs
COUNT ABORT DONE
When duration test is finished, the new values for length of belt and time are
TEST DURATION
Length = 0000.0 Ft
Time = 000 sec
CONTINUE
During the Acquire Test Duration, the Integrator performed an unassisted zero
calibration and installed the new zero. Skip to Step 19.
18. Manual Entry of Test Duration
This procedure allows direct entry of parameters that would otherwise be

generated by the acquire Test Duration modes. This menu is generally used
when the operator cannot see the belt while standing at the front panel.
Prior to performing the Manual Test Duration, it is necessary to measure and

time the conveyor belt. Using a 100 ft. tape, measure the entire length of the
conveyor belt to the nearest .01 ft. Place an easily identifiable mark on the
conveyor belt (paint Mark) and on a reference point of the conveyor (idler). Run
the belt at full speed and carefully time one or more complete revolutions (in

REC-3950 Rev G
seconds) of the belt. (Use a number of revolutions that will allow for a minimum
test time of at least 10 minutes.)
If MANUAL is pressed, the system prompts the operator for running the belt at
its maximum speed. Then press CONTINUE.
Start belt. Press

CONTINUE when belt
is at maximum speed.
ABORT CONTINUE
The operator is prompted to enter the length of one belt revolution.
ENTER length of one

belt revolution.
Length ooo.o FT
ENTER ABORT

Max: 10000.0 Ft Max: 10000.0 m
The number of belt revolutions to be timed is than entered.
ENTER the number of

belt revolutions to
be timed 000 revs
ENTER ABORT

REC-3950 Rev G
Default: 1
Min: 1
Max: 100
The next entry is the time required to complete the selected number of belt
revolutions.
ENTER the time for

revolutions to pass
reference 000 sec
ENTER ABORT
Default: 30 sec
Min: 1 sec
Max: 16200 sec
When ENTER is pressed, the system times the belt travel according to the
above entered parameters.
Zero Cal light illuminates indicating zero calibration in progress.
When test duration test is finished, the new values for length of belt and time are

REC-3950 Rev G
Timing belt travel
000 sec
ABORT
During Acquire Test Duration the integrator performed an unassisted zero

calibration and installed the new zero.
19. Automatic Calibration of the Scale
After Test Duration has been determined, and the scale zeroed, the integrator
performs an unassisted calibration of the scale. The scale is calibrated using
the parameters just entered. After this, the R-CAL (electronic calibration
resistor) is used to check the integrity of the load cell. During this time, the
following screen is displayed:
CALIBRATION
IN
PROGRESS
When calibration procedure is completed, the following message is displayed:
SCALE CALIBRATED
Press RUN to start
or MENU for scrolls
The Alarm light stops flashing and the Ready light illuminates.
The field data entered during this procedure enabled the Micro-Tech 2001 to
perform an unassisted zero balance and span calibration. Assuming no
mistakes were made, the scale is calibrated and is ready for use at this time.
Note: The span number was calculated from the data that was entered
during this programming procedure. This span number is based on a perfect
mechanical alignment of the scale and its adjacent idlers. Therefore, verify
this by performing a material span calibration or by performing a span
calibration procedure.
In case the load cell is not connected or a failure is detected, the following
message is displayed:

REC-3950 Rev G
SCALE NOT CALIBRATED
Press RUN to start
or MENU for scrolls
The problem causing the calibration to be aborted must be corrected before

attempting another calibration. The information entered previously is still in
memory and should not have to be reentered. After the problem has been
corrected, press MENU. Main Menu 1 should appear. If not, continue to press
MENU until Main Menu 1 appears.
Proceed to Main Menu 1, and conduct a zero calibration and a span

calibration. The scale is now calibrated using R-Cal as the simulated load.
Press RUN to start or MENU for scrolls.

REC-3950 Rev G
Chapter 3 Operation
Your Belt Scale System is capable of accurate weighing, provided it is installed,

calibrated, operated, and maintained in complete accordance with the instructions
contained in this manual, along with your scale frame installation manual.
Overview Model 2201 Integrator is a micro-computer based instrument that accepts and
conditions speed and weight signals and provides visual and electrical outputs for total
weight and rate of flow. A stable 10 volt DC excitation voltage capable of exciting up to
six strain gauge load cells is produced by the Integrator. Sense lead terminations are
also provided for six wire load cell cable.
Auto Zero Track enables the belt scale system to automatically zero itself during
extended periods when the conveyor belt is running empty. Auto Zero Track is menu
selectable because some installations may not desire this option. A "Z" will appear on
the second line of the display to indicate the selection of this option.
Life expectancy of the RAM support battery is approximately ten years, if power is not
applied. Under normal operation where power is on continuously, life expectancy will
be much longer.
Errors may occur during initial calibration and their reason must be corrected during
initial calibration. During normal operation, an error would most likely indicate a failure
in the system or improper operation.
Front Panel The front panel contains the necessary status indicators and keys to enable the
operator to perform calibrations and all required operations after the integrator has
been configured in Integrator Configuration.

REC-3950 Rev G
Front panel operation, zero calibration and span calibration are described in this
chapter. A detailed description of all menus and their contents can be found in
Appendix D.
Figure 3-1. Model 2201 Integrator Front Panel
LED Status Indicators The five red status indicators show the status of the integrator.
1. Zero Calibration in progress.

2. Span Calibration in progress.
3. Alarm pending.
4. Batch or Load Out running.
5. Ready (powered on, no alarm, no calibration running).
Keyboard 1. Run - Access the Run Menu. Returns integrator to Run Mode whenever pressed.
2. Menu - Permits entry to menus.
3. Up and Down Arrow - Scrolls up or down in the selected menu.
4. Soft Keys - Select displayed function directly above the key. Moves cursor left and
right during string editing.
5. Alpha/Numeric Keys 1 through 0 - Enter numerals and letters when string editing.
Similar to telephone keys.
6. Decimal Point Key - Enters decimal point.
7. Clear Key - Removes wrong entries prior to pressing ENTER soft key.
8. Total - Displays Master total, Reset total and Operator total. Operator and Reset

REC-3950 Rev G
total may be reset.
9. Print - Starts printout. COMM option is required, see Appendix A/4 for detailed
description.
10. Start - Starts load out. Restart if interrupted.
11. Stop - Interrupts load out. Aborts load out if already interrupted.
NOTE: Start - Stop keys are only active with Load Out option.
Display The four line display indicates actual running information or displays menu entry
information.
Menu Displays The integrator is a menu driven machine that allows the operator to access all setup,
test and calibration parameters. Main Menu screens 1 through 6 can be accessed at
anytime by pressing the MENU key until the desired menu screen is displayed. Menu
scrolls may be selected by pressing the soft key directly below the desired scroll, and
then using the Up/Down scroll key.
If the integrator is password protected, the appropriate password must be entered

prior to making changes or performing routine calibration. Menus may be viewed
without entering a password, but no entries are allowed unless the password is
entered.
Optional menu scrolls are only available if the available option has been installed. The
following screens are activated by the MENU key. See Appendix D for detailed
description of all menus.
- Main MENU 1 -
Press MENU for more
ZERO SPAN MATL
CAL CAL CAL
- MAIN MENU 2 -
Press MENU for more
SCALE CALIB
DISPLAY DATA DATA

REC-3950 Rev G
- MAIN MENU 3 -
Press MENU for more
PROT DIAG TEST
- MAIN MENU 4 -
Press MENU for more
I/O ALARMS LOAD
DEF. DEFIN. OUT
- MAIN MENU 5 -
Press MENU for more
* Can be AB RIO or PRO DP
COMM COMM B PRINT
*
- MAIN MENU 6 -
Press MENU for more
AUDIT
TRAIL LINEAR
Normal Power On When the Integrator is powered on after initial programming, the RUN Menu is
displayed unless the hardware configuration has been changed.
00000000 TONS
000000 TPH
Hardware If the hardware configuration detected at power on differs from the one recorded in
memory, the following screen is displayed. This only happens if a circuit board has
Configuration
been added or removed during power off, or a board has failed.

REC-3950 Rev G
- SLOT # n CHANGED -
Acquire new
configuration ?
YES NO
The screen disappears after 10 seconds if the question is not answered. The
Integrator assumes the answer is NO. "HW CONFIG. CHANGED" alarm is on and
cannot be reset. The above screen appears each time power is cycled.
If a board is removed or added, and this is a permanent change in configuration,

answer YES.
1. A board is removed and is not replaced:

The Integrator cancels from memory the setup data of the board that is removed.
If the board is added again, the setup data for the board has to be entered again.
2. A board is added:
The Integrator acquires the new hardware configuration. Setup data for the new
board must be entered.
NOTE: Check the setup configuration in the I/O Definition Scroll if an I/O board
is removed or added. I/O assignments change when the number of I/O boards
change.
If the reason for the message is not known, or if the change in configuration is
temporary and the operator does not want to lose the original setup, answer NO.
1. A board is removed:
The Integrator resumes operation, retaining setup data of the board that was
removed. All other boards continue working normally. No change occurs in I/O
Definition.
2. A board is added:
The Integrator resumes normal operation without recognizing the new board.
If NO is pressed, the "HW CONFIG. CHANGED" alarm stays on.

REC-3950 Rev G
Run Menu When the integrator is normally powered on after initial programming, the Run Menu is
displayed. The Run Menu can always be accessed by pressing the RUN key on the
front panel at any time.
Main Run The Run Menu consists of two operations, main Run Menu and Reset Total Menu.
They can be scrolled using the scroll UP or DOWN keys.
00000000 Tons
z 000000 TPH
The first line always displays the MASTER TOTAL, which is the number of tons
totalized by the scale since installation. This number cannot be cleared.
The second line always displays the rate. A "Z" appears on the left side if the "Auto
Zero Tracking" optional function is enabled in Main Menu 2 (Calibration Data Scroll)
and the scale is unloaded. The "Z" is not flashing during the first half test duration,
while the integrator is checking that the belt is really unloaded. Then, during a full test
duration, the "Z" is flashing, indicating the integrator is averaging the signal from the
load cell to accurately re-zero the scale. The load must stay below the AZT max
deviation setpoint during the cycle, otherwise auto zero is aborted.
The third line is by default blank, but can be programmed to show either the belt
speed, the belt loading or the date and time (if the optional COMM board is installed).
The selection is made in the Main Menu 2 (Display Scroll).

REC-3950 Rev G
Reset Total
RESET 0000000 Tons
Z 0000.00 TPH
RESET
The Reset Total Menu is similar to the main Run Menu except Master Total has been
replaced by Reset Total. Press the DOWN scroll key for access.
When the RESET key is pressed, the following screen is displayed:
Do you wish to clear

RESET total?
YES NO
Press "YES" to clear the total. Press "NO" to skip clearing.
Material Calibration The word MAT'L flashes in the left soft key position after a material calibration if the
static scale reference weight is not known. When the reference weight is known, press
the MAT'L soft key to resume and complete the material calibration procedure.
Alarm Pending The message ALARM appears in the right soft key if an alarm is pending. The alarm
LED also is flashing.
The following menu is displayed after pressing the ALARM soft key.
ALARM NEW
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
MM-DD-YYYY HH:MM
RESET NEXT
The keyword "NEW" indicates an alarm that has not been acknowledged yet. When
the operator presses the RESET key to clear the alarm, the alarm disappears only if
the reason that caused the alarm to occur does not exist anymore. If the alarm is still
pending, the keyword "ACK" is displayed instead of "NEW".

REC-3950 Rev G
The third line shows the date and time only if the optional COMM board is installed.
The NEXT key is used to scroll between the pending alarms. The string
"xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx" stands for one of the following alarm conditions.
1. Clock Fail
2. Load Cell Fail
3. Ram Fail
4. Rom Fail
5. Speed Sensor
6. High Load
7. Low Load
8. High Rate
9. Low Rate
10. High Speed
11. Low Speed
12. Warm Start
13. Cold Start
14. Power Down Calibrate
15. Calibrate Time
16. External Alarm 1
19. Overflow Totalizer
20. AZT Limited
21. Batch Deviation
22. BCD Error
23. through 28. Hardware Configuration Changed
29. Math Error
30. Printer Error
31. Communication Error
32. RIO COMM Error
33. PROFIBUS DP COMM Error
34. Auto Zero Limit

REC-3950 Rev G
35. AZT Step Over Limit
36. through 39. Not Assigned
Refer to Chapter 4.0, Maintenance, for more information.
Total Key The TOTAL key accesses menus that contain detailed information for Master Reset
and Operator total tons counters.
Master cannot be reset. Reset can be reset at will without password, and Operator
can be reset at will with password.
Press the TOTAL key for access and scroll up or down. Pressing RUN returns to the
Run Menu.
RESET TOTAL
SINCE 00-00-0000
00000000 Tons Password: Not Required
RESET
The second line (1) is only displayed if the optional COMM board is installed, and
indicates the last date when the Reset Total was cleared.
The RESET key allows the operator to clear the Reset Total. No password is required
for this action.
The next screen is very similar to the previous one, only the Master Total is displayed
instead of the Reset Total. The RESET key is not displayed here since the Master
Total cannot be cleared.

REC-3950 Rev G
MASTER TOTAL
SINCE 00-00-0000
00000000 Tons
RESET
A load out total can also be displayed if the Load Out optional board is installed (see
Load Out in Appendix A/5 if option is installed).
When the RESET key is pressed, the following screen is displayed:
Do you wish to clear

xxxxxx total?
YES NO
xxxxxx can be RESET or OPERATOR. Press "YES" to clear the total. Press "NO" to
skip clearing.
Start-Stop Keys Enabled only if load out option is installed.
Calibration Main Menu 1 contains the Calibration Menu. Menu 1 is selected by pressing the
MENU key until Main Menu 1 appears. Desired calibration scrolls are selected by
pressing the soft keys directly below the desired scroll.
- MAIN MENU 1 -
Press MENU for more
ZERO SPAN MATL
CAL CAL CAL

REC-3950 Rev G
Zero Calibrate Scroll The zeroing process is implemented as a machine directed procedure.
1. Auto Zero
- ZERO CAL -
Run belt empty, then
press START.
START EXIT MANUAL
Pressing the EXIT soft key returns the operator to Main Menu 1. Pressing
MANUAL advances to Step 2 below. Pressing RUN at any time returns to the Run
Menu.
The belt must be running during Auto Zero, since a complete zeroing procedure
requires at least one full revolution of the belt to be averaged.
When START is pressed, the following screen is displayed, the READY indicator
goes out, and the ZERO CAL indicator is illuminated.
AUTO ZEROING
Time remaining 0000
Rate: 000.0 Toh
Tot 000000 Tons
During Auto Zero, resolution of the total is ten times higher than normal. The
number of seconds in Line 2 is calculated based on the current speed, and
corresponds to the time remaining for completing the test. The third line displayed
is the current flow rate and the fourth line of the display is the accumulated weight
during the zero test. If the belt is not running at the moment the test is started or it
is stopped during the test, a message is displayed, indicating the procedure has
been aborted.

REC-3950 Rev G
WARNING Belt stopped
Calibration aborted.
EXIT
EXIT returns to Main Menu 1. When zero is reached, the system automatically
displays the following screen.
AUTO ZERO COMPLETE

Error +000.00%
Change zero?
YES NO ADV
The word "COMPLETE" is flashing. Pressing ADV changes from Error % to

Accumulated Weight. The percentage of error is related to full scale capacity.
If Auto Zero track has been enabled, ADV will display AZ Dev, the accumulated
A/D counts during previous Auto Zero Track tests. Pressing ADV again will display
the accumulated Auto Zero track percentage change (total AZ%) since the initial
zero test or a zero reference has been established.
Pressing NO returns the screen to Main Menu 1 without changing the zero
number.
When YES is pressed, the zero number is changed and the next screen appears.
ZERO # CHANGED
New zero # 00000
Old zero # 00000
RUN MENO ADV
ADV changes from "Old zero" to "Rate", to "Accumulated Weight", and to "Error
%".
Press MENU to repeat Auto Zero calibration. Press RUN to return to the Run
Menu.
2. Manual Zero
The Manual Zero procedure shows the zero constant and allows direct entry if

REC-3950 Rev G
known. Use the ENTER key to confirm the new number.
- MANUAL ZERO -
Rate 000.0 TPH Password: Operator
Zero # 00000
ENTER EXIT ADV
Default: 40000
Min: 0
Max: 12000
The ADV key is only displayed if Auto Zero Tracking option is enabled. The AZT
function accurately tracks the zero of the scale by calculating an additional zero
constant. The portion of zero due to AZT is not incorporated in the zero constant,
but is shown separately.
When ADV is pressed, the system scrolls between Zero, AZT and AZ deviation.
- MANUAL ZERO -
AZT # +000000 Password: Operator
AZT % +000000
ENTER EXIT ADV
When the AZT is displayed, the ENTER key incorporates the AZT number into the
Zero constant, so the displayed AZT number and percentage changes to zero.
Span Calibration Three simulated load calibration options are available: R-Cal, Test Weights and Test
Chains. Test Weights or Test Chains require additional hardware and handling
Scroll
equipment.
The system allows the operator to select which one of the three methods is to be used
for routine calibration. The selection is made in Main Menu 2, CAL DATA Scroll 1.
1. Auto Span
NOTE: Before beginning a span calibration with R-Cal, confirm the selected R-
Cal Resistor size in CAL DATA SCROLL 2.
a. Starting an R-Cal Calibration

REC-3950 Rev G
Press the SPAN CAL soft key. The following screen appears.
- AUTO SPAN R Cal -

run belt empty, then
press START.
START EXIT MANUAL
Pressing the EXIT soft key or MENU control key returns the screen to Main
Menu 1.
Press START to initiate R-Cal span calibration. There is no totalization for

three seconds until the weight signal has stabilized. Go to Step D below.
b. Starting a Chain Calibration

Stop the conveyor belt.
Apply chains on conveyor belt.
Press SPAN CAL soft key. The following screen appears.
- AUTO SPAN Chain -

Press START to begin Password: Operator
chain calibration.
START EXIT MANUAL
Press START to disengage the Master Tons counter. The following screen
appears.

REC-3950 Rev G
- AUTO SPAN Chain -
Apply chain, then
press START. Password: Operator
START EXIT MANUAL
Menu 1.
When START is pressed, the following screen appears.
- AUTO SPAN Chain -

Run belt, then
press START.
START EXIT
Restart conveyor belt and insure chain placement is proper.
Press START.
Go to Step D below.
c. Starting a Test Weights Calibration
Stop the conveyor belt if necessary to apply test weights.
- AUTO SPAN Weights -

weight calibration.
START EXIT MANUAL
appears.

REC-3950 Rev G
Apply weights, then Password: Operator
press START.
START EXIT MANUAL
If the LOAD WTS output has been selected in the I/O Definition Scroll, test
weights are automatically loaded after START is pressed. Wait for test
weights to be loaded before proceeding. The message displayed will be
Press START to load test weights.
Pressing EXIT returns the screen to Main Menu 1.
Apply test weights.

run belt, then Password: Operator
press START.
START EXIT
Restart the conveyor belt if it is not running and press START.
Go to Step D below.
d. Executing the Span Calibration

Whichever method has been used to start automatic span calibration, after
START is pressed, the following screen is displayed.
NOTE: Entry point when REPEAT is pressed (see below).
AUTO SPANNING
Time remaining 0000
Rate 000.0 TPH
Tot 000000 Tons
During Auto Span, the resolution of the total is ten times higher than normal.
The time remaining shown in Line 2 is calculated upon the current speed, and
it is based on the test duration. If the belt is stopped during the test, a

REC-3950 Rev G
message is displayed indicating the procedure has been suspended. No
action is required from the operator at this stage, just wait until the test is
completed.
e. Material Factor
This part of the procedure is only executed if a material calibration is done
before, and the current simulated load method has no material factor
installed.
NOTE: If a calibration with material has not been run before, or a manual span
entry is done, or this is not the first time the current simulated method is used,
this section does not apply. Go to Step F below.
It is very important to understand that when this procedure is executed, the

system does not alter the span. The span is assumed to be correct because it
was obtained from a test with material. The system acquires the Material
Factor for the current calibration method instead. This means the integrator
knows in the future how to use this method for correctly changing the
system's span.
AUTO SPAN COMPLETE

Error +/-00.00 %
Unfactored Calcon
EXIT FACTOR REPEAT
The word "COMPLETE" is flashing. If EXIT is pressed, the system

acknowledges the Material Factor is not used. The effect of this is the system
does not ask for a material factor any more for this calibration method until a
manual span entry is done. By pressing EXIT the operator tells the system
that material factors is not desired, but wants to use the test results for
changing the span number. After EXIT is pressed, go to Step F below. If
REPEAT is pressed go to Step D above.
If FACTOR is pressed, the following screen is displayed.

REC-3950 Rev G
R-CAL Matl FACTOR
New factor: 000.00 % Can be R-CAL or WTS or CHAINS
Change factor?
YES NO ADV
ADV advances to Old factor and again to New factor. If NO is pressed, the
Material Factor is set to 1.00 (see above), then go to Step F below.
If YES is pressed, the following screen is displayed.
R-CAL Matl FACTOR

Old factor: 00.00 % Can be R-CAL or WTS or CHAINS
New factor: 00.00 %
RUN MENU REPEAT
The REPEAT key returns the operator to Step D above. RUN and MENU can
be used for ending the procedure. After this point is reached, the system does
not proceed to the next section.
f. Recording New Span

The system calculates the new span based on the result of the test performed
with the simulated method.
AUTO SPAN COMPLETE

Error +/-00.00 %
Change span?
YES NO ADV
The word "COMPLETE" is flashing. Pressing ADV advances to Accumulated

Weight, Cal Con, Material Factor and back to Error%. If the Material Factor is
INVALID (never acquired before), it is not displayed.

REC-3950 Rev G
SPAN # CHANGED
Old span # 000000
New span # 000000
RUN REPEAT ADV
ADV changes from Error % to Accumulated Weight, Calcon, Old Span,

Material Factor (only if not INVALID). REPEAT moves back to Step D above
and calibration restarts.
If NO is pressed, the following screen is displayed.
SPAN UNCHANGED
Old span # 000000
New span # 000000
RUN REPEAT ADV
ADV changes from Error % to Accumulated Weight, Calcon, Old Span, and
Material Factor.
REPEAT moves back to Step D above and calibration restarts. Please note
the Old span and New span are shown equally. This is because no change to
the span has been done.
g. Ending an Auto Span Procedure with Chains or Test Weights
In case of auto-span with chains or weights, after RUN is pressed, the

following screen is displayed.
Remove chains (or weights)

before returning to
normal operation!!
RUN MENU
Pressing RUN resumes totalization and moves to the RUN Scroll.
h. Ending an Auto Span Procedure with R-Cal
In case of auto-span with R-Cal, after RUN is pressed, the R-Cal relay is de-
energized and the display is locked for three seconds.

REC-3950 Rev G
2. Manual Span
If the span constant is known, the manual span procedure allows the operator to
make a direct a change of span.
- MANUAL SPAN -
Span # 0000000
ENTER EXIT RUN
Default: 300000
Min: 222223
Max: 20000000
The EXIT key returns the operator to Main Menu 1.

It is very important to note that entering the Manual Span sets the material factors
to INVALID (if any). This means that the automatic span tests need to be run
again after a manual span entry has been performed, in order to acquire the
material factors again.
Material Span Material span calibration is a machine directed procedure for calibrating the belt scale
using actual material.
Calibration
Pre-weighed or post-weighed material, having been weighed to a known accuracy on
a static scale, passes across the belt scale. This procedure automatically adjusts the
integrator span and factors all simulated load test Cal Cons if the operator prefers they
be factored.
1. Material Calibration Procedure
Starting the Test
Press MATL CAL soft key and DOWN ARROW. The following screen
appears.

REC-3950 Rev G
MATL CALIBRATION
press START.
START MENU
The operator must run the belt for at least one minute or one belt revolution
before proceeding. After START is pressed, the master weight totalizer is
disengaged.
Run quantity of
material over scale.
CONTINUE
Press CONTINUE to go to the next scroll and follow the test procedure.
Running the Test with Material
0000.00 Tons
0000.0 TPH
Press DONE to end
DONE ABORT
During the material calibrate procedure, the resolution of total tons counted is
ten times higher than normal.
Wait until all material has passed over the scale, then press DONE. Pressing
ABORT forces the program back to the top of the MATL CAL Scroll.
Entering the Reference Weight
At the end of the test, the system asks the operator whether the (actual)
weight of the material is already known.

REC-3950 Rev G
0000.00 Tons
Ref. weight known?
YES NO
Press NO if the reference (actual) weight will not be known for some time and
the conveying systems need to be returned to run. If NO is pressed, the RUN
screen appears. MATL will be flashing to remind the operator that the
material test is incomplete.
Press MATL when the reference weight is known and enter in the following
screen.
If YES was answered before, or if the MAT'L key had been pressed after NO,
the following screen appears.
00000.00 Tons
Enter reference
weight 00.0 Tons
ENTER ABORT
The operator has to enter the actual material weight in the same weight units
as the integrator is setup for. Example: Convert pounds to the nearest
hundredth (0.01) of a ton and enter if the integrator is set up for tenths (0.1) of
a ton increment. Material calibration is running at ten time normal.
After the material weight is entered, press ENTER to confirm.
If ABORT is pressed, the information acquired during the test is lost and the
system returns to Main Menu 1 screen.
Updating the Span Constant
After the amount of material has been entered, the following screen is
displayed.

REC-3950 Rev G
MATL CAL COMPLETE
Error 000.00 %
Change span?
YES NO ADV

Actual Difference of Total. Pressing NO moves to "Add reference weight to
total".
Acquiring the Material Factors
If YES was pressed, the following screen is displayed confirming the new
span constant was installed. At this point, the scale is calibrated to the actual
material test.
SPAN # CHANGED
New span # 000000
Old span # 000000
RU MENU FACTOR
MATL CALIBRATION
Automatic correction
to Material Factors
R-CAL WTS CHAIN
Of the three simulated load calibration methods, only the ones that have
been already used are shown. It is not possible to calculate a material factor if
a simulated test was not run before the material test. If none of the three was
done, the FACTOR soft key in the previous scroll is not displayed.
If R-CAL or WTS or CHAIN is pressed:

REC-3950 Rev G
R-CAL Matl FACTOR
New factor 000.00 % Can be R-CAL or WTS or CHAINS
Change factor?
YES NO ADV
Pressing ADV advances to the Old factor and again to the New factor. YES
goes to the next scroll. NO goes back to Step E above. Press YES if this
specific simulated method of calibration has already been used and the
related material factor will be recorded. By doing this, the system is able to
execute accurate calibrations in the future with this simulated method. Press
NO if the acquired material factor is not desired. If YES is pressed, the
R-CAL Matl FACTOR

New factor: 00.00 %
RUN MENU FACTOR
The FACTOR key repeats for all simulated test previously run. If RUN or
MENU is pressed, the following screen is displayed.
Adding the Reference Weight to Total
MATL CALIBRATION
Add reference
weight to totals
YES NO
If YES is pressed, the amount of material used for the test is added to the
master, reset and operator's totals. If the answer NO is selected, the
information is lost.
NOTE: Moisture compensation is inhibited during material calibration. This is

done to make the check of the totalized quantity easier. The static scale
provides the weight of the material including moisture. The weight of the water
is removed immediately before adding to total at the end of the procedure, so
that the Master, Reset and Operators totals are still correct.

REC-3950 Rev G
Permanent Scroll
Record
Setup Scrolls
MAIN MENU 1
ZERO SCROLL
Zero # ____________
SPAN SCROLL
Span # ____________
MAIN MENU 2
DISPLAY SCROLL
1. Measure Units ____________
2. Totalization Units ____________
3. Length Units ____________
4. Rate Units ____________
5. Load Cell Units ____________
6. Language ____________
9. Run Display, Line 3 ____________
10. Damping Display Rate ____________
11. Damping Display Load ____________
12. Damping Display Speed ____________
SCALE DATA SCROLL

1. Max. Scale Capacity ____________
2. Scale Divisions ____________
3. Belt Scale Code # ____________
3A. Pivot to Load Cell ____________
3B. Number of Weigh Idlers ____________
3C. Pivot to 1st Idler ____________
3D. Pivot to 2nd Idler ____________
3E. Pivot to 3rd Idler ____________
3F. Pivot to 4th Idler ____________

REC-3950 Rev G
3G. Pivot to 5th Idler ____________
3H. Pivot to 6th Idler ____________
3I. Pivot to Test Weight Height ____________
3L. Pivot to Test Weight Length ____________
3M. Pivot to Carriage Height ____________
3N. Roll to Carriage Height ____________
3O. Number of Load Cells ____________
4. Idler Spacing ____________
5. Conveyor's Angle Degrees ____________
6. Load Cell Capacity ____________
7. Load Cell Sensitivity ____________
8A. Load Cell #1 Resistance ____________
8B. Load Cell #2 Resistance ____________
8C. Load Cell #3 Resistance ____________
8D. Load Cell #4 Resistance ____________
8E. Load Cell #5 Resistance ____________
8F. Load Cell #6 Resistance ____________
9. Speed Input ____________
10. Zero Dead Band Range ____________
11. Weights & Measures Mode ____________
1. Calibration Mode ____________
2. R-Cal: Resistance (Ohms) ____________
3. R-Cal: Cal-Constant ____________
4. Chain: Weight (Lbs/Ft) ___________
5. Chain: Cal Constant ____________
6. Total Test Weights (Lbs) ___________
7. Weight: Cal-Constant ___________
8. Calibration Interval Days ________Days
9. Calibration Date ____________
10. R-Cal: Mat'l Factor ____________

REC-3950 Rev G
Chain: Mat'l Factor ____________
Weight: Mat'l Factor ____________
11. Test Duration _ Full _ Partial _ Manual
Belt Length ____________
Number of Revolutions ____________
Test Time ____________
12. Auto Zero Tracking _ Yes _ No
12A. Auto Zero Tracking Range ___________%
12B. Auto Zero Tracking Step ___________%
12C. Auto Zero Tracking Max. Dev. ___________%
12D. Auto Zero Tracking Warm Time Min _________Min
13. Max. Speed Capacity ____________
14. Auto Zero Max Dev ___________%
15. Zero Reference ____________
MAIN MENU 3
PROTECTION SCROLL
1. Protection Level _ None _ Ltd _ Prot
DIAGNOSTICS SCROLL
1. A/D Gross ____________
A/D Net ____________
2. Weight on Load Cell ____________
2A. Load Cell Output Zero ____________
2B. Load Cell Output Span ____________
3. Pre-scale ____________
Pulses/Minute ____________
3A. Test Duration Total Pulses ____________
3B. Test Duration Total Length ____________
4. Service Password ____________
5. Operator Password ____________
6. Software Version ____________
9. Board Type Slot #1 ____________

REC-3950 Rev G
10. Board Type Slot #2 ____________
11. Board Type Slot #3 ____________
12. Board Type Slot #4 ____________
13. Board Type Slot #5 ____________
14. Board Type Slot #6 ____________
MAIN MENU 4
I/O DEFINE SCROLL
1. Current Output #1 Define ____________
Current Output #2 Define __________mA
1A. Current Output #1 Range __________mA
Current Output #2 Range __________mA
1B. Current Output #1 Delay _________secL
Current Output #2 Delay _________secL
1C. Current Output #1 Damping __________sec
Current Output #2 Damping __________sec
2. Analog Input #1 Definition ____________
2A. Moisture Input Calibrate _______%_____V
2B. Moisture Input Calibrate _______%_____V
3. Analog Input #2 Definition ____________
3A. Conveyor Low Position ______Degrees
3B. Conveyor High Position ______Degrees
4. Digital Input Define Physical
Input __ Status
External Alarm #1 ___________/_______
External Alarm #2 ___________/_______
External Alarm #3 ___________/_______
Print ___________/_______
Belt Running ___________/_______
Reset Total ___________/_______
Reset Alarm ___________/_______
Auto Zero ___________/_______

REC-3950 Rev G
Clip Detector ___________/_______
Calibration Select 1 ___________/_______
5. Digital Output Define Physical
Output Status
Alarm ___________/_______
Shutdown ___________/_______
Ready ___________/_______
High Load ___________/_______
Low Load ___________/_______
High Rate ___________/_______
Low Rate ___________/_______
High Speed ___________/_______
Low Speed ___________/_______
Print Ready ___________/_______
Deviation Alarm ___________/_______
Out of Range ___________/_______
Totalizer ___________/_______
Batch Preset ___________/_______
Batch End ___________/_______
Load WTS (Weights) ___________/_______
Dev. Alarms ___________/_______
Out of Range ___________/_______

REC-3950 Rev G
6. Remote Counter Division ____________
7. Remote Counter Pulse Width ____________
10. Clip Detector Mode ____________
10A. Clip Detector Length ____________
ALARMS SCROLL
1. Rate Alarm _ Yes _ No
1A. Low Rate Set _______%____sec
1B. High Rate Set _______%____sec
2. Load Alarm _ Yes _ No
2A. Low Load Set _______%____sec
2B. High Load Set _______%____sec
3. Speed Alarm _ Yes _ No
3A. Low Speed Set _______%____sec
3B. High Speed Set _______%____sec
4. Low Speed Set _______%____sec
4A. Belt Slip Set _______%____sec
5. Alarm Set As _ Alarm _ Shutdown _ None
#1 Clock Fail ____________
#2 Load Cell Fail ____________
#3 RAM Fail ____________
#4 ROM Fail ____________
#5 Speed Sensor ____________
#6 High Load ____________
#7 Low Load ____________
#8 High Rate ____________
#9 Low Rate ____________
#10 High Speed ____________
#11 Low Speed ____________
#12 Warm Start ____________
#13 Cold Start ____________
#14 P.D. Calibrate ____________

REC-3950 Rev G
#15 Calibrate Time ____________
#16 Ext. Alarm #1 ____________
#17 Ext. Alarm #2 ____________
#18 Ext. Alarm #3 ____________
#19 Overflow Totalizer ____________
#20 AZT Limit ____________
#21 Batch Deviation ____________
#22 BCD Error ____________
#23 through 28 HW Conf. Change ____________
#29 Math Error ____________
#30 Printer Error ____________
#31 COMM Error ____________
#32 Allen-Bradley RIO Error ____________
#33 PROFIBUS DP Error ____________
#34 Auto Zero Limit ____________
#35 AZT Step Limit ____________
LOAD OUT SCROLL
1. Preset Weight ____________
2. Pre Act Correction ____________
2A. Pre Act Value ____________
2B. Pre Act Range ____________
2C. Pre Act Length ____________
3. Start Delay ____________
4. Coasting Time ____________
5. Batch Deviation ____________
6. Print Batch ____________
7. Position Batch Num. X= Y=
8. Position Batch Quant. X= Y=
9. Position Batch Total X= Y=
MAIN MENU 5
COMM A SCROLL

REC-3950 Rev G
1. Baud Rate Port #1 ____________
2. Set Parity Port #1 ____________
3. Stop Bits Port #1 ____________
4. Word Length Port #1 ____________
5. Protocol Port #1 ____________
5A. Clear to Send #1 ____________
6. Address Port #1 ____________
7. Access Prot Port #1 ____________
8. Baud Rate Port #2 ____________
9. Set Parity Port #2 ____________
10. Stop Bits Port #2 ____________
11. Word Length Port #2 ____________
12. Protocol Port #2 ____________
12A. Clear to Send #2 ____________
13. Address Port #2 ____________
14. Access Prot Port #2 ____________
PRINT SCROLL
1. Handshaking ____________
2. End of Line ____________
3. Delay End of Line ____________
4. Form Feed ____________
5. Print Interval ____________
6. Print Time #1 ____________
7. Print Alarms ____________
8. Totals Report Format ____________
9A. Number of Strings ____________
9B. Contents String #1 ____________
9C. Position String Number #1 ____________
9D. Contents String #2 ____________
9E. Position String #2 ____________
9F. Contents String #3 ____________

REC-3950 Rev G
9G. Position String #3 ____________
9H. Position Oper. Total ____________
9I. Position Reset Total ____________
9J. Position Master Total ____________
9K. Position Date ____________
9L. Position Time ____________
9M. Position Rate ____________
9N. Position Avg. Rate ____________
9P. Position Running ____________
MAIN MENU 6
AUDIT TRAIL SCROLL
1. Audit Trails _ Yes _ No
1. Linearization _ Yes _ No
LIN Factor #1 ____________
LIN Factor #2 ____________
LIN Factor #3 ____________
LIN Factor #4 ____________
LIN Factor #5 ____________

REC-3950 Rev G
Permanent Field Record Conveyor Number ____________________________________
Date _______________________________________________
Scale Capacity _________________________ (Tons Per Hour)
Belt Scale Code Number ________________________
Belt Scale Weighbridge Dimensions
Pivot to Load Cell Distance _____________ (Inches)
Number of Weigh Idlers __________________
Pivot to Weight Idler Distance (Inches)
1st _______________ 4th _______________
2nd _______________ 5th _______________
3rd _______________ 6th _______________
Pivot to Test Weight Height _____________ (Inches)

Pivot to Test Weight Length _____________ (Inches)
Pivot to Carriage Height ________________ (Inches)
Carry Roll to Carriage Height ___________ (Inches)
Number of Load Cells __________________________

Idler Spacing _________________________________ (Inches)
Conveyor's Angle of Incline ___________________ (Degrees)
Load Cell Capacity ____________________________ (Pounds)
Conveyor Belt Length __________________________ (Feet)

REC-3950 Rev G
Calibration Report CALIBRATION REPORT - PERMANENT RECORD
Conveyor _____________
Date
By
Scale Capacity
Belt Length
Test Length
Test Time
Calib. Constant
R-Cal
Static
Chain
Calibration Mode
Zero As Found
-As Left
Span As Found
-As Left

REC-3950 Rev G
Chapter 4 Maintenance
The maintenance information in this manual should meet your service needs. If
problems occur that require technical assistance, please call 800-445-3503.
Thermo Fisher Scientific has a repair center located at our plant in Minneapolis,
Minnesota. Contact our Repair Representative at 800-445-3503 for assistance. To
expedite your service request, please have your machine model and serial number
available.
When returning parts for repair, please use the Return Material Authorization number.
Frequent The Micro-Tech 2201 Integrator is a solid-state device, and as such, should require
very little maintenance. The front panel can be wiped clean with a damp cloth, and if
Checkpoints necessary, a mild detergent (never use abrasive cleaners, especially on the display
window). As a preventative measure, check that all wires, plugs, and integrated
circuits are tight in their connectors. Also keep the enclosure door tightly closed to
prevent dirt infiltration.
More often than not, a quick visual inspection leads to the source of trouble. If a
problem does develop, check the following before proceeding to more specific
troubleshooting procedures.
1. Check Power
a. Check that the two (2) Line Voltage Selector Switches are set to the correct
line voltage.

REC-3950 Rev G
b. Check the fuses.
c. Check that the power switch is ON and that power is supplied to the unit.
2. Check Connections
a. Check that all terminations are secure.
b. Check that the Display Module and Keyboard connectors are firmly seated
in their connectors.
c. Check that the Remote Counter and optional input/output modules are
secure in their sockets.
d. Check that all Jumpers are in their correct position.
Troubleshooting This unit has built-in troubleshooting capabilities. A number of possible problems are
automatically detected and screen messages are displayed. Also refer to the
Diagnostics Test Scrolls in Main Menu 3.
Alarm Message The ALARM message is assigned to the right hand soft key when an alarm is
pending. The ALARM message and its LED flash at the same time.
The following screen is displayed when the right hand soft key is pressed.
ALARM NEW
MM-DD-YYYY HH:MM
RESET NEXT
The keyword "NEW" indicates an alarm that has not yet been acknowledged. When
the operator presses the RESET key to clear the alarm, the alarm disappears only if
the reason that caused the alarm to occur does not exist anymore. If the alarm is still
pending, the keyword "ACK" is displayed instead of "NEW".
The third line shows the date and time only if the optional COMM board is installed.
The NEXT key is used to scroll between the pending alarms. The string
"xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx" represents one of the following alarm conditions.
Alarm List 1. Clock Fail
The system has detected a failure on the clock calendar circuit. This alarm only

REC-3950 Rev G
occurs if the optional COMM board is installed.
Check the COMM board to see if it is properly inserted.

Replace the COMM board.
2. Load Cell Fail
The system has detected an error on the load cell signal.

Check the load cell connections.
Check the load cell(s).
3. RAM Fail
The system has detected an error on the RAM checksum during the internal
periodical test. The RAM (Random Access Memory) is used to store variables
and set up data.
Replace the CPU board.
4. ROM Fail
The system has detected an error on the ROM checksum during the internal
periodical test. The ROM (Read Only Memory) is used to store the program.
Replace the CPU board.
5. Speed Sensor
This message can only appear if the DUAL speed mode is selected. The system
has detected a difference between the speeds of the two sensors, higher than the
one specified in the ALARM menu.
Check the speed sensors.
6. High Load
The belt load has been detected to be higher than the maximum belt loading
entered in the ALARM SET UP MENU.
7. Low Load
The belt load has been detected to be lower than the minimum belt loading
entered in the ALARM SET UP MENU.

REC-3950 Rev G
8. High Rate
The rate has been detected to be higher than the maximum rate entered in the
ALARM SET UP MENU.
9. Low Rate
The rate has been detected to be lower than the minimum rate entered in the
ALARM SET UP MENU.
10. High Speed
The speed has been detected to be higher than the maximum speed entered in
the ALARM SET UP MENU.
11. Low Speed
The rate has been detected to be lower than the minimum speed entered in the
ALARM SET UP MENU.
12. Warm Start
The system has detected a power loss condition, or power was removed for an
undefined period of time.
13. Cold Start
The system has detected the loss of the set up data after power was removed.
The instrument needs to be set up and calibrated.
Replace either the mother board or the battery.
NOTE: The message COLD START never appears on the screen. This is
because a Cold Start forces a start up procedure to be executed, and the alarm
itself is cleared after the set up is completed. However, the alarm LED and the
digital output will be showing an alarm during the initial set up procedure.
14. P.D. Calibrate
When the system is powered off while a calibration sequence is in progress, the
scale may not be properly calibrated.
Check calibration.
15. Calib Time

REC-3950 Rev G
If a calibration check time period is entered and the time expires, this alarm
occurs. The purpose is to remind the operator that the calibration has not been
checked for a considerably long period of time.
Check calibration.
16. Ext. Alarm 1
Digital inputs can be programmed to detect external alarm conditions such as

emergency switches, max level switches or other. This alarm is associated to the
external alarm #1.
Check external alarm #1.
17. Ext. Alarm 2
18. Ext. Alarm 3
19. Overflow Tot.
This message indicates the output pulse generator for the remote mechanical
totalizer has reached an overflow condition. The rate may be too high or the pulse
divider has been set too small.
Check the rate.
Check and eventually increase the pulse divider.
This message is also displayed if the Master Total rolls over.
20. AZT Limit
The Auto Zero Tracking function has reached the maximum limit of tare that is
allowed to be automatically cleared. The scale may be dirty or misaligned.
Check and clean the scale.
Perform an auto zero.
21. Batch Deviat.
This alarm is only visible if the optional Load Out board is installed. It is generated

REC-3950 Rev G
when a batch is run and the error detected at the end of the batch is higher than
specified.
Check the parameters of the load out.
Adjust the preact value.
22. BCD Error
This message is only displayed if the optional BCD output board is installed. If the
variable to be converted in the BCD format has more than 4 digits, the alarm is
generated.
Check the size of variables and the BCD data setup.
23. HW Conf. Changed
When a new board is installed or an old board removed, this message appears.
Refer to Appendix A/4 of this document (normal power on).
29. Math Error
A divide by zero or overflow error is encountered during internal calculations. This

message indicates some abnormal dimensional parameter is entered in setup.
Check setup data.
30. Printer Error
This message is displayed if the system has data to print and the printer is
disconnected or the paper feed is empty.
31. Communication Error
This message is only displayed if the optional COMM board is installed. It

indicates that a time out or handshake error is detected during a data transfer on
the COMM line.

REC-3950 Rev G
Check the COMM line connections.
Check the COMM line setup data.
32. Allen-Bradley Remote I/O COMM Error
This message is displayed if communication is interrupted. The green LED on the

A-B RI/O board will be flashing. The alarm does not come on if communication
has never started.
33. PROFIBUS-DP COMM Error
This message is only displayed if the optional PROFIBUS board is installed. The
following two conditions activate the alarm.
a. If the Siemens SPC3 controller installed on the PROFIBUS interface board

does not recognize any successful data transfer within the watch dog timer
interval.
b. If the received data contains errors (value overlaps limits, register number
does not exist, group number does not exist).
34. AUTO ZERO Limit
This message is displayed when after an Auto Zero test the change made in zero
is greater than the Auto Zero Max Deviation. This alarm will be logged as an
Audit Trail Record. The alarm can be acknowledged, but will not clear until a new
Auto Zero returns the zero value back to within limit or a new zero reference is
entered.
35. AZT Step Limit
If Auto Zero track needs to correct more than the assigned step value, only the
step value will be zeroed and the AUTO ZERO STEP alarm will be activated.
When an Auto ZERO TRACK completes within the step limit, the alarm will self
clear.
Micro-Tech 2000 Cold It may be necessary to cold start the Micro-Tech 2000 in the event the software
becomes corrupted. You have the option of installing the factory default constants or
Start
simply returning the Micro-Tech 2000 to its previous running state.
There are two methods of forcing a cold start via the front panel: in RUN mode or
from the DIAGNOSTIC SCROLL.

REC-3950 Rev G
1. To force a cold start RUN mode:
Press and hold in at the same time the LEFT HAND ARROW key and the CLEAR
key until the following screen appears.
Install Factory
Defaults?
NO YES
Pressing NO returns the Micro-Tech 2000 to the RUN mode.

If YES is pressed, the following screen appears.
- MEMORY ERASED -
Choose the language
key to continue to
ESP USA
When the above screen appears, all field entry data has been replaced by the
factory default constants. Proceed to Programming the Micro-Tech 2201
Integrator.
NOTE: If the software corruption was catastrophic and the memory would not
erase in the above step, do the following:
Press and hold in the LEFT HAND ARROW key and the CLEAR key. While
holding in both keys, cycle line power. In the event the MEMORY ERASED
screen does not appear, consult the Factory.
Press and hold in the LEFT HAND ARROW key and the CLEAR key. While
holding in both keys, cycle line power. In the event the MEMORY ERASED
screen does not appear, consult the Factory.
2. To force a cold start from the DIAGNOSTIC SCROLL:
Press MENU until MAIN MENU 3 appears, then press the DIAG soft key. Press
the down arrow key until the following screen is displayed:

REC-3950 Rev G
- DIAGNOST. SCROLL 15 -
Force cold start
ENTER
When you press ENTER, the following screen is displayed:
ATTENTION
ARE YOU SURE?
YES RETURN
Pressing RETURN will return to DIAGNOSTIC SCROLL 1
Pressing YES displays the following screen:
Install Factory
Defaults?
YES RETURN
Pressing RETURN will return to DIAGNOSTIC SCROLL 1
Pressing YES clears all field entry data and installs factory default constants. The
following screen is displayed:
- MEMORY ERASED -
Choose the language
key to continue to
ESP USA
Internal Test Pressing START on the screen (located in Main Menu 3) enacts a self-test of the
internal microprocessor.
Procedure

REC-3950 Rev G
- TEST SCROLL 2 -
Internal test of microprocessor. Password: Service
START
After START is pressed, the following screens are displayed in sequence.
- TEST SCROLL 2A -
Testing ROM
Test PASSED
- TEST SCROLL 2B -
Testing RAM
Test PASSED
- TEST SCROLL 2C - Only if Audit Trail is installed

Testing E2PROM
Test PASSED
The message "Test PASSED" is displayed if the test runs correctly. If something
wrong is detected, then the message "Test FAILED" is displayed, and the soft key
CONTINUE is shown. The operator has to press the key to go on to the next test.
If the internal test has failed, call Thermo Fisher Scientific's Customer Service
Department.
Load Cell Excitation 1. Measure excitation voltage across terminal 21 negative and 20 positive in the
scale junction box. This should be 10 VDC +/- 5%.
and Signal Voltage
2. Measure DC millivolt signal voltage across terminal 22 positive and 23 negative in
the scale junction box. This should be within 0-30 millivolts DC (3 mV/V load cell).
3. The millivolt output is in direct relation to weight applied. As weight is increased,

output should increase.
4. Measure DC millivolt signal voltage across terminal TB9-12 positive and TB9-11

REC-3950 Rev G
negative in the Integrator. This should be the same as Step 3 above.
5. The millivolt output is in direct relation to weight applied. As weight is increased,

output should increase.
Resetting Master Steps required to reset master total or to reset remote counter overflow are given
below.
Total Procedure
1. If No Password is Installed
a. Select Main Menu 3.
b. Press DIAG soft key and scroll down to the Service Password screen.
c. Type in a password (Example: 123) and press ENTER.
d. Re-enter the password and press ENTER.
e. Select Main Menu 3.
f. Press PROT scroll and press PROT soft key.
g. Press the NONE soft key.
h. Type in password 7832500 and press ENTER. The protection level should be
RAMSEY.
i. Press the TOTAL key on the touch panel. Scroll up or down if needed to
reach the Master Total screen.
j. Press the RESET soft key and answer YES to Reset Master Total?
k. Select Main Menu 3. Press the DIAG soft key and scroll down to Service
Password.
l. Press ENTER twice, erasing the password installed in Step 3.
m. Press the RUN key to return to normal operation.
2. If Password is Already Active
a. Select Main Menu 3.
b. Press the PROT scroll and press the PROT soft key.
c. Press the NONE soft key.
d. Type in password 7832500 and press ENTER. The protection level should be
RAMSEY.
e. Press the TOTAL key on the touch panel. Scroll up or down if needed to
reach the Master Total screen.

REC-3950 Rev G
f. Press the RESET soft key and answer YES to Reset Master Total?
g. Select Main Menu 3.
h. Press the PROT scroll and choose the password level desired.
To Remove a 1. Select Main Menu 3.

Forgotten Password 2. Press the PROTECT scroll and press the PROT soft key.
3. Press the NONE soft key.
4. Type in password 7832500 and press ENTER. The protection level should be
RAMSEY.
5. Press NONE.
6. Select Main Menu 3.
7. Press the DIAG soft key and scroll down to Service Password.
8. Press ENTER twice. The display should respond with New Password Acquired.
9. Scroll down to Operator Password. Press ENTER twice. The display should
respond with New Password Acquired.
10. Select Main Menu 3. The PROT soft key should not appear, indicating all
passwords have been erased. If PROT should appear, repeat Steps 1 through 9.
11. See Appendix A/4 for entering new passwords.
Lithium Battery The Micro-Tech volatile memory backup battery can be replaced without any special
tools. See Figure 4-1 for battery location on the mother board.
Replacement
WARNING: DANGER OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS INCORRECTLY
REPLACED.
Replace only with same or equivalent type recommended by Thermo Fisher

Scientific. Dispose of used battery according to manufacturers instruction on battery
or return to Thermo Fisher Scientific.
1. Record all configuration, setup and calibration data before removing battery. All
information is lost when the battery is removed.
2. Turn the Micro-Tech power off at the mains.
3. Remove the battery from its compression socket.

REC-3950 Rev G
4. Observe the polarity markings on the battery socket base before inserting the new
battery. The lithium battery is 3.0 V, 1.2 AH, 2/3 A., Thermo Fisher Scientific part
number 037188.
5. Insert battery.
6. Restore power to the Micro-Tech.
7. Cold start the Micro-Tech. See cold start procedure, Micro-Tech 2000 Cold Start.
8. Re-enter all data recorded in Step 1.
Disposal of Disposal of Lithium batteries and soldered printed circuit boards should be in
accordance with your local Hazardous Waste Policy.
Hazardous Waste
As an alternative, you may return product supplied by Thermo Fisher Scientific, freight
prepaid for disposal. Contact our repair department for a Return Authorization
Number before shipping any product for disposal.
Cleaning Instructions The Micro-Tech 2201 Integrator is a solid-state device, and as such, should require
very little maintenance. The front panel can be wiped clean with a damp cloth, and if
necessary, a mild detergent (never use abrasive cleaners, especially on the display
window). As a preventative measure, check that all wires, plugs, and integrated
circuits are tight in their connectors. Also keep the enclosure door tightly closed to
prevent dirt infiltration.

REC-3950 Rev G
Chapter 5 Service,
Repair and
Replacement Parts
This chapter provides information about service, repair, and replacement parts for
your Thermo Fisher Scientific product. It includes the telephone numbers for various
departments at Thermo Fisher Scientific, the procedure for ordering replacement
parts, and any parts lists are also included in this chapter.
The maintenance information in this manual is designed to meet your service needs. If
you should encounter a problem that requires technical assistance, you may call
Thermo Fisher Scientific Product Service at (800) 445-3503.
Thermo Fisher Scientific also provides on-site service technicians to assist customers
with installation, setup, initial calibration, customer training, maintenance, and repair.
Contact the Thermo Fisher Scientific Field Service department at the number given
below for current rates and scheduling.
Thermo Fisher Scientific has repair centers located at the plant in Minneapolis,
Minnesota. Products that need system checkout or repair can be returned to the plant
with the Return Material Authorization number. Contact our Repair and Return
Department (800) 445-3503 to get a number and form.
NOTE: Have your machine model number and serial number available when you
call.
Main Switchboard: 763-783-2500

FAX: (763) 783-2525
Service: (800) 445-3503
Return Material Authorization & Repair: (800) 445-3503

REC-3950 Rev G
24/7 phone support
Or any local Thermo Fisher Scientific office.
Parts Ordering For the fastest service when ordering parts, telephone or FAX the Thermo Fisher
Scientific Parts Department at the numbers given below. Your regional field service
Information representative can also assist you with parts orders.
The recommended procedure for ordering parts is:
1. Determine the broken or faulty part.
2. Locate the part in the Parts List.
3. Find the part number(s) for the item(s) you need.
4. Before you contact Thermo Fisher Scientific for your parts, make sure you have
the following information:
Machine model and serial number
Purchase Order number
Date Required
Preferred shipping method
Part number(s), description, and quantity needed.
Telephone or FAX:
Thermo Fisher Scientific

Customer Service Department
501 90th Ave. NW
Minneapolis, MN 55433
FAX: (763) 783-2525
Phone: (800) 445-3503
Return Material Authorization and Repair: (800) 445-3503
E-mail:
Service.W&I.mpls@thermofisher.com
Parts.W&I.mpls@thermofisher.com

REC-3950 Rev G
Phone/Fax Australia Spain
+61 (0) 8 8208-8200 +34 91-484-5965
Contacts for +61 (0) 8 8234-3772 fax +34 91-484-3597 fax
service.auadl@thermofisher.com commercial.pid.esmad@thermofisher.com
Thermo Fisher
Scientific Offices Brazil United States & Canada
+55-11-2367-2192 +1 (800) 445-3503
+55-11-2367-2192 fax +1 (763) 783-2525 fax
service.bulk.us@thermofisher.com
parts.bulk.us@thermofisher.com
Canada sales.bulk.us@thermofisher.com
(See United States)
Chile
+56 (2) 2378 5080
+56 (2) 2370 1082 fax
ventas.Bulk.LA@thermofisher.com
China - Beijing
+86 10-8419-3588
+86 10-8419-3580 fax
Germany
+49 (0) 208-824930
+49 (0) 208-852310 fax
service.oberhausen@thermofisher.com
sales.oberhausen@thermofisher.com
India - Mumbai
+91-22-4157-8800
+91-22-4157-8801 fax
sales.process.in@thermofisher.com
Italy
+39 02-950590.1 main
+39 02-950590.55 sales
+39 02-953200.15 fax
sales.mi.ramsey.it@thermofisher.com
Mexico
+52 55 1253-9411
+52 55 5300-0876 fax
email.mxnau.sales@thermofisher.com
South Africa
+27 (0) 11-776-0000
+27 (0) 11-822-3982 fax
sales@thermo.co.za

REC-3950 Rev G
Parts List
Equipment Part Number
Chassis Assembly, Panel Mount 048598
Chassis Assembly, Field Mount 050102
PCBA, Mother board 051326
PCBA, Analog Output (1 out) 071639
PCBA, Analog Output (2 in/2 out) 071636
PCBA, DIO (4 in/16 out) 046841
PCBA, DIO (15 in/4 out) 046844
PCBA, COMM A Select 1 only 068053
RS-232C
RS-485, std. (point to point)
RS-485, multi-drop
20 mA (digital) current loop
PCBA, LED Assembly 046847
PCBA, Display Assembly 046860
PCBA, Touch Panel Model 2201 048671
PCBA, Field Terminal Entry 047572
PCBA, Load Out DIO (4 in/16 out) 049475
PCBA, Load Out DIO (16 in/4 out) 049476
PCBA, Profibus-DP 056713
Fuse, Slo-Blo, .5 Amp (F1 220V) (Type T) 001366
Fuse, Slo-Blo, 1.0 Amp (F1 110V) (Type T) 002443
Fuse, Slo-Blo, 4.0 Amp (F1 Board) (Type T) 037287
Prom, U1, Mt-2000 Audit Trail 050500
Battery, Lithium, 3.0 V, 1.2 AH, 2/3 A 037188
Transformer, Power 046863
Module, Power Input 180-240 VDC 047646
Module, Power Input 90-120 VAC 047575
Module, Power Input 10-32 VAC 048162
Module, Power Output 24-240 VDC 046814
Module, Power Output 5-60 VAC 046814
Disposal of Disposal of lithium batteries and soldered printed circuit boards must be in
accordance with your local Hazardous Waste Policy.
Hazardous
Waste As an alternative product supplied by Thermo Fisher Scientific may be returned
freight pre-paid, for disposal. Contact the Repair Department for a Return Material
Authorization Number before shipping any product for disposal

REC-3950 Rev G
Appendix A Weighbridge Physical
Parameters
This appendix contains a listing of all weighbridges manufactured by Thermo Fisher
Scientific. Each weighbridge is assigned a code number to be entered during initial
programming of the Integrator. This code number defines the selected Weighbridges
default parameters and enables the Integrator to calculate span calibration constants
(Calcon) for simulated calibration modes selected.
Weighbridge physical parameters can be altered by pressing the soft key DETAIL in
Scale Data Scroll 3. Scroll down to the desired parameter and enter in the correct
factor. Cal-Con's are calculated.
Weighbridges not manufactured by Thermo Fisher Scientific can be defined by

entering code number 0 and pressing DETAIL in Scale Data Scroll 3. Scroll down and
enter the weighbridge parameters in scroll positions 3A through 8F.
Physical parameters and typical scale models are as follows:
Thermo Fisher Scientific A-1

REC-3950 Rev G
Table A-1. Weighbridge Physical Parameters
SCALE DATASCROLL PARAMETER

POSITIONS
3 Belt Scale Code #
3A (LA)Pivot to Load Cell Distance
3B (IDL)No. of Weigh Idlers
3C (LB1)Pivot to 1st Idler Distance
3D (LB2)Pivot to 2nd Idler Distance
3E (LB3)Pivot to 3rd Idler Distance
3F (LB4)Pivot to 4th Idler Distance
3G (LB5)Pivot to 5th Idler Distance
3H (LB6)Pivot to 6th Idler Distance
3I (LE)Pivot to Test Weight Height
3L (LC)Pivot to Test Weight Length
3M (LF)Pivot to Carriage Height
3N (LG)Carry Roll to Carriage Height
3O No. of Load Cells
4 (LD)Idler Spacing
5 Conveyor's Angle Degrees
6 Load Cell Capacity Pounds
7 Load Cell Sensitivity mV/V
8A Load Cell No.1 Resistance ohms
8B Load Cell No.2 Resistance ohms
8C Load Cell No.3 Resistance ohms
8D Load Cell No.4 Resistance ohms
8E Load Cell No.5 Resistance ohms
8F Load Cell No.6 Resistance ohms
A-2 Thermo Fisher Scientific

REC-3950 Rev G
Model 10-20-1
Model 10-22 Model 10-17-2
Model 10-17-4
Model 10-14-4
Figure A-1. Typical Weighbridges

REC-3950 Rev G
Rules for Entering
the Parameters
L.C. Must be entered
Idlers Must be entered
LA Defaults to one if zero is entered
LB1 Defaults to one if zero is entered
LB2 Defaults to LB1 if zero is entered
LC Defaults to one if zero is entered
LD Must be entered
LE Defaults to zero
LF Defaults to zero
LG Defaults to zero
Table A-2. Rules for Entering the Parameters

REC-3950 Rev G
Tables for The tables at the end of this appendix show the default value for scale model
selections, no value means that the parameter is not useful for that scale model and
Thermo Fisher it is not displayed.
Scientific Under scored dimensions are in metric.
Weighbridges
Table A-3. Thermo Fisher Scientific Weighbridges
Table of Thermo Fisher Scientific Weighbridges
LB1
LB2
MODEL
CAL L.C LB3 LF
# BELT LA LC LD LE mV/V
KIT IDLERS LB4 LG
WIDTH
LB5
LB6
10-20-1 1 6.5
1 50-34 32 24 24 36 0 3.00
18-36 1 6.5
10-20-1 1 6.5
2 50-34 32 22.75 22.75 36 0 3.00
42-72 1 7
10-20-1 2 6.5
3 50-34 32 24 24 36 0 3.00
24-36 1 6.5
10-20-1 2 6.5
4 50-34 32 22.75 22.75 36 0 3.00
42-84 1 7
1 6.5
5 10-20-2 50-34 36 18 18 36 0 3.00
2 7
1 6.5 3.00
6 10-20-2 50-34 48 24 24 48 0
2 7
10-20-1 1 6.5
7 50-30 32 24 38 36 -4.5 3.00
18-36 1 6.5
10-20-1 1 6.5
8 50-30 32 22.75 38 36 -4.5 3.00
42-72 1 7
10-20-1 2 6.5
9 50-30 32 24 38 36 -4.5 3.00
24-36 1 6.5
10-20-1 2 6.5
10 50-30 32 22.75 38 36 -4.5 3.00
42-84 1 7
10-22 1 54 6.5
11 50.30 62 38 36 -4.75 3.00
18-36 2 18 6.5
10-22 1 63 6.5
12 50-30 71 42 42 -4.75 3.00
18-36 2 21 6.5
10-22 1 72 6.5
13 50-30 80 48 48 -4.75 3.00
18-36 2 24 6.5
10-22 1 52.75 6.5
14 50-30 62 36 38 -4.75 3.00
42-48 2 16.75 7

REC-3950 Rev G
LB1
LB2
MODEL
CAL L.C LB3 LF
KIT IDLERS LB4 LG
WIDTH
LB5
LB6
10-22 1 61.75 6.5
15 50-30 71 42 42 -4.75 3.00
42-48 2 19.75 7
10-22 1 70.75 6.5
16 50-30 80 48 48 -4.75 3.00
42-48 2 22.75 7
10-22 1 54 6.5
17 50-30 62 68 36 -4.5 3.00
18-36 2 18 6.5
10-22 1 63 6.5
18 50-30 71 77 42 -4.5 3.00
18-36 2 21 6.5
10-22 1 72 6.5
19 50-30 80 86 48 -4.5 3.00
18-36 2 24 6.5
10-22 1 52.75 6.5
20 50-30 62 68 36 -4.5 3.00
42-48 2 16.75 7
10-22 1 61.75 6.5
21 50-30 71 77 42 -4.5 3.00
42-48 2 19.75 7
10-22 1 70.75 6.5
22 50-30 80 86 48 -4.5 3.00
42-48 2 22.75 7
10-22 1 54 6.5
23 50-34 62 54 36 0 3.00
18-36 2 18 6.5
10-22 1 63 6.5
24 50-34 71 63 42 0 3.00
18-36 2 21 6.5
10-22 1 72 6.5
25 50-34 80 72 48 0 3.00
18-36 2 24 6.5
10-22 1 52.75 6.5
26 50-34 62 52.75 36 0 3.00
42-48 2 16.75 7
10-22 1 61.75 6.5
27 50-34 71 61.75 42 0 3.00
42-48 2 19.75 7
10-22 1 70.75 6.5
28 50-34 80 84 48 0 3.00
42-48 2 22.75 7
1 4
29 10-20-WF BAR 32 24 24 30 -2 3.00
1 4
1 4
30 10-20-WF BAR 32 22.75 22.75 30 2 3.00
1 4
1 4
31 10-20-WF BAR 32 24 36 30 2 3.00
1 4
1 4
32 10-20-WF BAR 32 22.75 36 30 2 3.00
1 4
2 54 6.5
33 10-17-2 50-17 64 36 36 -4.75 3.00
2 18 7

REC-3950 Rev G
LB1
LB2
MODEL
CAL L.C LB3 LF
KIT IDLERS LB4 LG
WIDTH
LB5
LB6
2 63 6.5
34 10-17-2 50-17 76 42 42 -4.75 3.00
2 21 7
2 72 6.5
35 10-17-2 50-17 88 48 48 -4.75 3.00
2 24 7
2 57.06 1000 6.5
36 10-17-2 50-17 70.74 37 -4.75 3.00
2 19.68 39.37 7
2 70.86 1200 6.5
37 10-17-2 50-17 88 24 -4.75 3.00
2 23.62 47.24 7
2 54 6.5
38 10-17-4 50-17 64 36 36 -4.75 3.00
4 18 7
2 63 6.5
39 10-17-4 50-17 76 42 42 0 3.00
4 21 7
2 72 6.5
40 10-17-4 50-17 88 48 48 0 3.00
4 24 7
2 57.06 1000 6.5
41 10-17-4 50-17 70.74 37 0 3.00
4 19.08 39.37 7
2 70.86 1200 6.5
42 10-17-4 50-17 88 24 0 3.00
4 23.62 47.24 7
2
43 10-14-3 50-14 36 3.00
4
4
44 10-14-3 50-14 42 3.00
3
4
45 10-14-3 50-14 48 3.00
3
46
4
47 10-14-4 50-14 36 3.00
4
4
48 10-14-4 50-14 42 3.00
4
4
49 10-14-4 50-14 48 3.00
4
4
50 10-14-4 50-14 54 3.00
4
4 1000
51 10-14-4 50-14 3.00
4 39.37

REC-3950 Rev G
LB1
LB2
MODEL
CAL L.C LB3 LF
KIT IDLERS LB4 LG
WIDTH
LB5
LB6
4 1200
52 10-14-4 50-14 3.00
4 47.24
1
53 10-30 50-30 36 1.80
1
10-11 1 6.5
54 WTS 55.5 48 40 36 6.5 3.00
18-42 1 6.5
10-11 1 7
55 WTS 56.5 48 40 36 7 3.00
48-72 1 7
1 7
56 10-12 WTS 66 48 40 36 7 3.00
2 7
2 24 6.5
57 10-17-2D 50-17 40 24 48 0 3.00
2 24 7
2 21 6.5
58 10-17-2D 50-17 34 21 42 0 3.00
2 21 7
2 18 6.5
59 10-17-2D 50-17 28 18 36 0
2 18 7
60
1 1000
214 10-101R-1 50-30 2.00
1 39.37
2 1000
215 10-101R-2 50-30 2.00
1 39.37

REC-3950 Rev G
Appendix B Linearization
.
Request REC 3909 from factory
Thermo Fisher Scientific B-1

REC-3950 Rev G
Appendix C Digital Input/Output
The integrator has provision for up to 24 programmable digital inputs and 24
programmable digital outputs. Located on the Mother Board are two speed inputs, two
programmable inputs, three programmable outputs, and one non-programmable
Micro-Tech hardware fault output. One speed input is defaulted to a programmable
input unless the belt slip option is installed.
Optional DIO boards can be added if additional I/O is required.
Mother Board
Digital I/O
Digital Inputs 1. (2) speed and (2) programmable digital (DC) inputs (Figure A/3-1)
a. optically isolated
b. powered by internal +24 V DIO supply, 6 mA maximum
c. Cable Length: 150 ohm maximum. (7500 ft. of 20 AWG)
Figure C-1. General Purpose Digital Inputs
Thermo Fisher Scientific C-1

REC-3950 Rev G
Digital Outputs 1. (3) programmable and (1) non-programmable failure digital open collector
outputs (Figure A/3-2)
able to drive TTL, CMOS, or relay solenoids

current sinking socketed drivers
+24 VDC internal supply, 100 mA DC maximum per output
failure output is fail safe, turns off under fault condition
Figure C-2. General Purpose Fault Output
Digital In addition to the programmable digital inputs and outputs on the Mother board,
optional Digital I/O (DIO) expansion boards can be added. Available boards are DIO
Input/Output input board 16 inputs/4 outputs, output board 16 outputs/4 inputs or 20 inputs/20
Board outputs by adding both boards.
Configuration Both DIO boards provide isolated contact closure inputs and 24 volt current sinking
(default) or current sourcing (consult Factory) isolated outputs. The DIO input board
connector J16 is a male 25 pin sub-miniature D connector and the DIO output board
connector J15 is a female connector.
Internal or external 24 VDC power for the DIO boards is controlled by selectable
jumpers OP1 and OP2 located on the lower right hand side of the DIO boards
(Figure C-3). All inputs and outputs use the same selected power supply. See table
below for jumper positions.
C-2 Thermo Fisher Scientific

REC-3950 Rev G
JUMPERS
POWER SOURCE OP1 OP2
Internal A A (Default)
External B B
The isolated contact closure inputs are activated by completing the circuit from the
input to the negative side of the 24 VDC supply. Approximately 6 mA of current
flows out of each input during contact closure.
The outputs of the DIO boards use 2803 current sinking (default) type ICs. The
output ICs are installed in sockets to allow replacing the output IC only, rather than
the board if the IC is damaged.
The output ICs can be replaced with 2981 type ICs for current sourcing
applications. Wire jumpers W1 through W4 must be relocated for current sourcing
(see Figure C-3). In most cases, it is recommended that the boards be returned to
the factory for converting from current sinking (default) to current sourcing. See
table below for jumper positions.
JUMPERS
CURRENT W1 W2 W3 W4
(Default)
Sinking Yes No Yes No
Sourcing No Yes No Yes

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure C-3. Digital Input/Output Boards
16 In\4 Out DIO 1. (16) programmable inputs

Board Specification 2. (4) programmable outputs
3. Connector
25 pin D connector (male). Connector is interchangeable with a 20 or 22 pin
subminiature D connector dimensionally complying with MIL-C-24308.
4 In/16 Out DIO 1. (4) programmable inputs

Board Specification 2. (16) programmable outputs

REC-3950 Rev G
3. Connector
25 pin D connector (female). Connector is interchangeable with a 20 or 22 pin
subminiature D connector dimensionally complying with MIL-C-24308.
Figure C-4. Digital Inputs/Outputs

REC-3950 Rev G
BCD Input Option Load sizes for load out or batching applications can be remotely entered by BCD.
An optional Load Out input output board is required.
Figure C-5. BCD Input

REC-3950 Rev G
Appendix D MT2201 Menus
Menu Displays The integrator is a menu driven machine that allows the operator to access all setup,
test and calibration parameters. Main Menu screens 1 through 6 can be accessed at
anytime by pressing the MENU key until the desired menu screen is displayed. Menu
scrolls may be selected by pressing the soft key directly below the desired scroll, and
then using the Up/Down scroll key.
If the integrator is password protected, the appropriate password must be entered

prior to making changes or performing routine calibration. Menus may be viewed
without entering a password, but no entries are allowed unless the password is
entered.
Optional menu scrolls are only available if the available option has been installed. The
following screens are activated by the MENU key.
- MAIN MENU 1 -
Press MENU for more
ZERO SPAN MATL
CAL CAL CAL
- MAIN MENU 2 -
Press MENU for more
SCALE CALIB
DISPLAY DATA DATA
Thermo Fisher Scientific D-1

REC-3950 Rev G
- MAIN MENU 3 -
Press MENU for more
PROT DIAG TEST
- MAIN MENU 4 -
Press MENU for more
I/O ALARMS LOAD
DEF. DEFIN. OUT
- MAIN MENU 5 -
Press MENU for more
COMM A COMM B PRINT
- MAIN MENU 6 -
Press MENU for more
AUDIT
TRAIL LINEAR
Main Menu 1 Main Menu 1 contains the Calibration Menu. Menu 1 is selected by pressing the
MENU key until Main Menu 1 appears. Desired calibration scrolls are selected by
pressing the soft keys directly below the desired scroll.
- MAIN MENU 1 -
Press MENU for more
ZERO SPAN MATL
CAL CAL CAL
D-2 Thermo Fisher Scientific

REC-3950 Rev G
Zero Calibrate Scroll The zeroing process is implemented as a machine directed procedure.
1. Auto Zero
- ZERO CAL -
press START.
START EXIT MANUAL
Pressing the EXIT soft key returns the operator to Main Menu 1. Pressing
MANUAL advances to Step 2 below. Pressing RUN at any time returns to the Run
Menu.
The belt must be running during Auto Zero, since a complete zeroing procedure
requires at least one full revolution of the belt to be averaged.
When START is pressed, the following screen is displayed.
AUTO ZEROING
Time remaining 0000
Rate: 000.0 TPH
Tot 000000 Tons
During Auto Zero, resolution of the total is ten times higher than normal. The
number of seconds in Line 2 is calculated based on the current speed, and
corresponds to the time remaining for completing the test. The third line displayed
is the current flow rate, and the fourth line of the display is the accumulated weight
during the zero test. If the belt is not running at the moment the test is started or it
is stopped during the test, a message is displayed, indicating the procedure has
been aborted.
WARNING Belt stopped

Calibration aborted.
EXIT
EXIT returns to Main Menu 1. When zero is reached, the system automatically
displays the following screen.

REC-3950 Rev G
AUTO ZERO COMPLETE
Error +000.00%
Change zero?
YES NO ADV

Accumulated Weight. The percentage of error is related to full scale capacity.
If Auto Zero track has been enabled, ADV will display AZ Dev, the accumulated
A/D counts during previous Auto Zero Track tests. Pressing ADV again will display
the accumulated Auto Zero track percentage change (total AZ%) since the initial
zero test or a zero reference has been established.
Pressing NO returns the screen to Main Menu 1 without changing the zero
number.
When YES is pressed, the zero number is changed and the next screen appears.
ZERO # CHANGED
New zero # 00000
Old zero # 00000
RUN MENU ADV
ADV changes from "Old zero" to "Rate", to "Accumulated Weight", and to "Error
%".
Press MENU to repeat Auto Zero calibration. Press RUN to return to the Run
Menu.
2. Manual Zero
The Manual Zero procedure shows the zero constant and allows direct entry if
known. Use the ENTER key to confirm the new number.

REC-3950 Rev G
- MANUAL ZERO -
Zero # 00000
ENTER EXIT ADV
Default: 4000
Min: 0
Max: 12000
The ADV key is only displayed if Auto Zero Tracking option is enabled. The AZT
function accurately tracks the zero of the scale by calculating an additional zero
constant. The portion of zero due to AZT is not incorporated in the zero constant,
but is shown separately.
When ADV is pressed, the system scrolls between Zero, AZT, and AZ Deviation.
- MANUAL ZERO -
AZT # 000000 Password: Operator
AZT % 000000
ENTER EXIT ADV
When the AZT is displayed, the ENTER key incorporates the AZT number into the
Zero constant, so the displayed AZT number and percentage changes to zero.
Span Calibration Three simulated load span calibration options are available: R-Cal, Test Weights and
Test Chain. Test Weights or Test Chains require additional hardware and handling
Scroll
equipment.
The system allows the operator to select which one of the three methods is to be used
for routine calibration. The selection is made in Main Menu 2, CAL DATA Scroll 1.
1. Auto Span
NOTE: Before beginning a span calibration with R-Cal, confirm the selected R-
Cal resistor size in CAL DATA SCROLL 2.
a. Starting an R-Cal Calibration

REC-3950 Rev G
- AUTO SPAN R Cal -
press START.
START EXIT MANUAL
Menu 1.
Press START to initiate R-Cal span calibration. There is no totalization for

three seconds until the weight signal has stabilized. Go to Step D below.
b. Starting a Chain Calibration

Stop the conveyor belt.
Apply chains on conveyor belt.
Press SPAN CAL soft key. The following screen appears.
- AUTO SPAN Chain -

chain calibration.
START EXIT MANUAL
Press START to disengage the Master Tons counter. The following

screen appears.
- AUTO SPAN Chain -

Apply chain, then Password: Operator
press START.
START EXIT MANUAL
Menu 1.

REC-3950 Rev G
- AUTO SPAN Chain -
run belt, then
press START.
START EXIT
Restart conveyor belt and insure chain placement is proper.
Press START.
Go to Step D below.
c. Starting a Test Weights Calibration

Stop the conveyor belt if necessary to apply test weights.

weight calibration.
START EXIT MANUAL
appears.

Apply weights, then Password: Operator
press START.
START EXIT MANUAL
If the LOAD WTS output has been selected in the I/O Definition Scroll, test
weights are automatically loaded after START is pressed. Wait for test
weights to be loaded before proceeding. The message displayed will be
Press START to load test weights.
Pressing EXIT returns the screen to Main Menu 1.
Apply test weights.

REC-3950 Rev G
Run belt, then Password: Operator
press START.
START EXIT
Restart the conveyor belt if it is not running and press START.
Go to Step D below.
d. Executing the Span Calibration
Whichever method has been used to start automatic span calibration, after
START is pressed, the following screen is displayed.
NOTE: Entry point when REPEAT is pressed (see below).
AUTO SPANNING
Time remaining 0000
Rate 000.0 TPH
Tot 000000 Tons
During Auto Span, the resolution of the total is ten times higher than normal.
The time remaining shown in Line 2 is calculated upon the current speed, and
it is based on the test duration. If the belt is stopped during the test, a
message is displayed indicating the procedure has been suspended. No
action is required from the operator at this stage, just wait until the test is
completed.
e. Material Factor
This part of the procedure is only executed if a material calibration is done

before, and the current simulated method has no material factor installed.
NOTE: If a calibration with material has not been run before, or a manual span
entry is done, or this is not the first time the current simulated load method is
used, this section does not apply. Go to Step F below.
It is very important to understand that when this procedure is executed, the

system does not alter the span. The span is assumed to be correct because it

REC-3950 Rev G
was obtained from a test with material. The system acquires the Material
Factor for the current calibration method instead. This means the integrator
knows in the future how to use this method for correctly changing the system's
span.
AUTO SPAN COMPLETE

Error 00.00 %
Unfactored Calcon
EXIT FACTOR REPEAT
The word "COMPLETE" is flashing. If EXIT is pressed, the system

acknowledges the Material Factor is not used. The effect of this is the system
does not ask for a material factor any more for this calibration method until a
manual span entry is done. By pressing EXIT the operator tells the system
that material factors is not desired, but wants to use the test results for
changing the span number. After EXIT is pressed, go to Step F below. If
REPEAT is pressed go to Step D above.
R-CAL Matl FACTOR

New factor: 000.00 % Can be R-CAL or WTS or CHAINS
Change factor?
YES NO ADV
ADV advances to Old factor and again to New factor. If NO is pressed, the
Material Factor is set to 1.00 (see above), then go to Step F below.
R-CAL Matl FACTOR

New factor: 00.00 %
YES NO ADV
The REPEAT key returns the operator to Step D above. RUN and MENU can
be used for ending the procedure. After this point is reached, the system does
not proceed to the next section.
f. Recording New Span

REC-3950 Rev G
The system calculates the new span based on the result of the test performed
with the simulated method.
AUTO SPAN COMPLETE

Error 00.00 %
Change span?
YES NO ADV
The word "COMPLETE" is flashing. Pressing ADV advances to Accumulated

Weight, Cal Con, Material Factor and back to Error %. If the Material Factor is
INVALID (never acquired before), it is not displayed.
SPAN # CHANGED
Old span # 000000
New span # 000000
RUN REPEAT ADV
ADV changes from Error % to Accumulated Weight, Calcon, Old Span,

Material Factor (only if not INVALID). REPEAT moves back to Step D above
and calibration restarts.
If NO is pressed, the following screen is displayed.
SPAN UNCHANGED
Old span # 000000
New span # 000000
RUN REPEAT ADV
ADV changes from Error % to Accumulated Weight, Calcon, Old Span, and
Material Factor.
REPEAT moves back to Step D above and calibration restarts. Please note
the Old span and New span are shown equally. This is because no change to
the span has been done.
g. Ending an Auto Span Procedure with Chains or Test Weights

REC-3950 Rev G
In case of auto-span with chains or weights, after RUN is pressed, the
Remove chains (or weights)

before returning to
normal operation!!
RUN MENU
Pressing RUN resumes totalization and moves to the RUN Scroll.
h. Ending an Auto Span Procedure with R-Cal
In case of auto-span with R-Cal, after RUN is pressed, the R-Cal relay is
deenergized and the display is locked for three seconds.
2. Manual Span
If the span constant is known, the manual span procedure allows the operator to
make a direct a change of span.
- MANUAL SPAN -
Rate: 000.0 TPH Password: Operator
Span # 0000000
ENTER EXIT RUN
Default: 300000
Min: 222223
Max: 20000000
The EXIT key returns the operator to Main Menu 1.
It is very important to note that entering the Manual Span sets the material factors
to INVALID (if any). This means that the automatic span tests need to be run
again after a manual span entry has been performed, in order to acquire the
material factors again.
Material Spam Material span calibration is a machine directed procedure for calibrating the belt scale
using actual material.
Calibration
Pre-weighed or post-weighed material, having been weighed to a known accuracy on
a static scale, passes across the belt scale. This procedure automatically adjusts the

REC-3950 Rev G
integrator span and factors all simulated load test Cal Cons if the operator prefers they
be factored.
1. Material Calibration Procedure
a. Starting the Test
Press MATL CAL soft key and DOWN ARROW. The following screen
appears.
MATL CALIBRATION
press START.
START MENU
The operator must run the belt for at least one minute or one belt revolution
before proceeding. After START is pressed, the master weight totalizer is
disengaged.
Run quantity of
CONTINUE
Press CONTINUE to go to the next scroll and follow the test procedure.
b. Running the Test with Material
00000.0 Tons
0000.0 TPH
Press DONE to end
DONE ABORT
During the material calibrate procedure, the resolution of total tons counted is
ten times higher than normal.
Wait until all material has passed over the scale, then press DONE. Pressing
ABORT forces the program back to the top of the MATL CAL Scroll.

REC-3950 Rev G
c. Entering the Reference Weight
At the end of the test, the system asks the operator whether the (actual)
weight of the material is already known.
0000.00 Tons
Ref.weight known?
YES NO
Press NO if the reference (actual) weight will not be known for some time and
the conveying systems need to be returned to run. If NO is pressed, the RUN
screen appears. MATL will be flashing to remind the operator that the
material test is incomplete.
Press MATL when the reference weight is known and enter in the following
screen.
If YES was answered before, or if the MAT'L key had been pressed after NO,
the following screen appears.
00000.00 Tons
Enter reference
weight 00.0 Tons
ENTER ABORT
The operator has to enter the actual material weight in the same weight units
as the integrator is setup for. Example: Convert pounds to the nearest
hundredth (0.01) of a ton and enter if the integrator is set up for tenths (0.1) of
a ton increments. Material calibration is running at ten times normal.
After the material weight is entered, press ENTER to confirm.
If ABORT is pressed, the information acquired during the test is lost and the
system returns to Main Menu 1 screen.
d. Updating the Span Constant
After the amount of material has been entered, the following screen is
displayed.

REC-3950 Rev G
MATL CAL. COMPLETE
Error 000.00 %
Change span?
YES NO ADV

Actual Difference of Total. Pressing NO moves to "Add reference weight to
total".
e. Acquiring the Material Factors
If YES was pressed, the following screen is displayed confirming the new
span constant was installed. At this point, the scale is calibrated to the actual
material test.
SPAN # CHANGED
New span # 000000
Old span # 000000
RUN MENU FACTOR
MATL CALIBRATION
Automatic correction
to Material Factors
R-CAL WTS CHAIN
Of the three simulated load calibration methods, only the ones that have been
already used are shown. It is not possible to calculate a material factor if a
simulated test was not run before the material test. If none of the three was
done, the FACTOR soft key in the previous scroll is not displayed.
If R-CAL or WTS or CHAIN is pressed:
R-CAL Matl FACTOR

New factor 000.00 % Can be R-CAL or WTS or CHAINS
Change factor?
YES NO ADV

REC-3950 Rev G
Pressing ADV advances to the Old factor and again to the New factor. YES
goes to the next scroll. NO goes back to Step E above. Press YES if this
specific simulated method of calibration has already been used and the
related material factor will be recorded. By doing this, the system is able to
execute accurate calibrations in the future with this simulated method. Press
NO if the acquired material factor is not desired. If YES is pressed, the
R-CAL Matl FACTOR

New factor: 00.00 %
RUN MENU FACTOR
The FACTOR key repeats for all simulated test previously run. If RUN or
MENU is pressed, the following screen is displayed.
f. Adding the Reference Weight to Total
MATL CALIBRATION
Add reference
weight to totals
YES NO
If YES is pressed, the amount of material used for the test is added to the
master, reset and operator's totals. If the answer NO is selected, the
information is lost.
NOTE: Moisture compensation is inhibited during material calibration. This is

done to make the check of the totalized quantity easier. The static scale
provides the weight of the material including moisture. The weight of the water
is removed immediately before adding to total at the end of the procedure, so
that the Master, Reset and Operators totals are still correct.
Main Menu 2 Main Menu 2 contains the setup and configuration menus. Main Menu 2 is selected by
pressing the MENU key until Main Menu 2 appears. Setup scrolls are selected by
pressing the key directly below the desired scroll.

REC-3950 Rev G
- MAIN MENU 2 -
Press MENU for more
SCALE CALIB
Display DATA DATA
Display
1. Measure Units
- DISPLAY SCROLL 1
Measure units Password: Service
> English <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: ENGLISH
Selections ENGLISH, METRIC, MIXED
NOTE: If the Measure units are changed from English to Metric (or vice versa)
after the scale is calibrated, the span number will change but the calibration will
remain the same.
The units to be used for totalization are selected here. Press ENTER soft key to
accept the default unit, or CHOICES soft key to scroll selections. Press ENTER to
confirm your selection. Scroll down.
Totalization Units Password: Service
> Tons <
CHOICE ENTER
If ENGLISH Default Tons

Selections Tons, LTons, Pounds
If METRIC Default: tonnes
Selections: tonnes, kg
If MIXED Default: Tons
Selections: Tons, LTons, Pounds, tonnes, kg
Units used for parameters expressed in length are selected here. Selections are

REC-3950 Rev G
only available if MIXED units are in use. Press ENTER soft key to accept the
default unit, or CHOICES soft key to scroll selections. Press ENTER to confirm
your selection. Scroll down.
Length Units Password: Service
< feet
CHOICE ENTER

If METRIC: Default: meters
If MIXED Default: Feet
Selections: Feet, meters
The rate is displayed according to the units selected here. Press ENTER soft key
to accept the default unit, or CHOICES soft key to scroll selections. Press ENTER
to confirm your selection. Scroll down.
Rate Units Password: Service
> TPH <
CHOICE ENTER

Selections: TPH, LTPH, Lb/h,
Percent %, Lb/m, T/m, LT/m
If METRIC: Default: kg/h
Selections: t/h, kg/h, kg/m, t/m, Percent %
If MIXED: Default: TPH
Selections: TPH, LTPH, Lb/h, Percent %, t/h, kg/h,
kg/m, t/m, Lb/m, T/m, LT/m
The units used for entering the load cell capacity are specified here. In this
particular case, the use of English or Metric units is always allowed. Press ENTER
soft key to accept the default unit, or CHOICES soft key to scroll selections. Press
ENTER to confirm your selection. Scroll down.

REC-3950 Rev G
Load Cell Units Password: Service
> Pounds <
CHOICE ENTER
If ENGLISH or Mixed: Default: pounds

If METRIC: Default: kilograms
Selections: Lbs, kg
2. Defining the Language
The Micro-Tech 2000 is a dual language instrument. English is always the first
language, the second can be one from the following list. Press the DOWN scroll
key.
Language Password: Service
> USA <
CHOICE ENTER
3. Setting Time and Date Mode
This section applies only if the COMM board is installed. The user has to define
the format for displaying and printing time and date.
Time
> am/pm <
CHOICE ENTER
If USA or English: Default: am/pm

If other language: Default: 24 h
Selections: am/pm, 24/h

REC-3950 Rev G
Date
> MM-DD-YYYY <
CHOICE ENTER
If USA: Default: MM-DD-YYYY

If other language: Default: DD-MM-YYYY
Selections: DD-MM-YYYY,
MM-DD-YYYY,
YYYY-MM-DD
4. Setting Line 3 of the Run Menu
The Run Menu can be configured to display on line 3 for Belt Loading, Speed,
Date and Time (if COMM is installed) or No Display (the default selection).
Run display line 3 Password: Operator
> No Display <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NO DISPLAY
Selections NO DISPLAY, LOAD, SPEED, DATE/TIME (only if COMM A
board is installed
5. Setting Damping Factors for the Display
The process variables when displayed on the screen can be damped by a

programmable factor, to filter out variations that can be introduced by mechanical
vibrations. To tune a damping filter, enter the number of seconds corresponding to
the desired time constant. If for example 10 seconds is entered, the process
variable reaches the stability after a step change in 10 seconds. This damping
factor only affects the display, not the current output variable, which has a
separate damping factor, selectable in Main Menu 4, I/O Define.

REC-3950 Rev G
Damping Display RATE Password: Operator
Damping = 2 sec
ENTER
Default: 2 sec
Min: 0 sec
Max: 400 sec
The following screen is only displayed if RUN display line 3 is set to load.
Damping Display LOAD Password: Operator
Damping = 2 sec
ENTER
Default: 2 sec
Min: 0 sec
Max: 400 sec
The following screen is only displayed if the Run display Line 3 is set to Speed:
Damping Displ SPEED
Damping = 2 sec
ENTER
Default: 2 sec
Min: 0 sec
Max: 400 sec
Scale Data Refer to Determining Installation Parameters and Appendix A, Thermo Fisher
Scientific Weighbridge Physical Parameters.
1. Scale Capacity and Divisions

REC-3950 Rev G
The first entry is the scale capacity, which is the maximum rate at which the scale
is allowed to work. This entry also defines the default number of decimal places
that are used for displaying rate. Use numeric keys for entering the number,
confirm with ENTER. Scroll down.
Max. scale capacity Password: Service
500.0 TPH
ENTER
Default: 500.0
Min: 1
Max: 200000
When the Scale capacity is entered, the number of decimal places is also defined.
If, for example, the User enters 500.0, this sets the "Scale Divisions" parameter to
0.1. Advancing to the next scroll, the User then sees first the Scale Division
corresponding to the just entered Scale Capacity (in the example 0.1). If required,
the User is able to alter the Scale Division to any of the available options.
Press the ENTER soft key to accept the default divisions, or the CHOICES soft
key to scroll selections. Press ENTER to confirm your selection. Scroll down.
Scale divisions Password: Service
> 0.1 <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: 0.1
Selections: 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 0.01, 0.02, 0.05, 0.001, 0.002, 0.005
2. Selecting the Weighbridge Model
By entering the code number of your Thermo Fisher Scientific scale on the next
screen, the Integrator automatically calculates parameters of the system such as
number of load cells and number of weigh idlers. This entry is also used for
internal calibration calculations. The default model number for the Model 2201
Integrator is 1, which corresponds to the belt scale model 10-20-1.

REC-3950 Rev G
Belt scale code # Password: Service
> 49
ENTER DETAIL
Default: 49
Min: 0
Max: 500
Press ENTER to accept the displayed selection from the database listed in
Appendix A/1, Thermo Fisher Scientific Weighbridge Physical Parameters. If
ENTER is used, the scrolls from 3A to 3J are not displayed. Skip to Step 4,
Defining Dimensional Parameters of the Application.
Press DETAIL if you want to force the following scrolls 3A to 3O to be displayed

even if ENTER was used.
Enter 0 if you want to define the weighbridge not using the database. This should
only be done for special weighbridges not being part of the standard set of
Thermo Fisher Scientific scales. Entering 0 forces the following scrolls 3A to 3O to
be displayed.
3. Detailing the Mechanical Parameters of the Frame
The following screens are only displayed if OTHER or DETAIL were pressed.
Figure 1-1 in Appendix A/1, Thermo Fisher Scientific Weighbridge Physical
Parameters, can be used to identify the following parameters.
Parameter LA: pivot to Load Cell distance: The distance from pivot to load cell
should be measured to within 0.032 (1/32) inch (1 mm).
Using the numeric keys, enter the distance recorded in Chapter 2 Determining
Installation Parameters Section and press ENTER. For weighbridges which do not
Pivot to load cell Password: Service
distance: 000.00 In
ENTER

REC-3950 Rev G
Min: 0.00 In Min: 0 mm
Max: 150.00 in Max: 3800 mm
This is the number of weigh idlers affixed to the scale weighbridge.
# of weight idlers Password: Service
1
ENTER
Default: 1
Min: 1
Max: 6
Parameter LB1: Pivot to first weigh idler distance. Measure the distance
between the pivot centerline and first weigh idler grease fitting. Enter the distance
(within 0.032 inch or 1 mm) recorded in Determining Installation Parameters.
For weighbridges which do not have a pivot, enter zero.
Pivot to 1st idler Password: Service
distance 000.00 In
ENTER

Max: 100.00 in Max: 2500 mm
If the number of weigh idlers entered in scroll 3B is more than one, the following
screens are displayed. Measure the distance between the pivot centerline and first
weigh idler grease fitting. Enter the distance (within 0.032 inch or 1 mm) recorded
earlier. For weighbridges which do not have a pivot, enter zero.

REC-3950 Rev G
Pivot to end idler Password: Service
distance 000.00 In
ENTER

Max: 100.00 in Max: 2500mm
Pivot to 3rd idler Password: Service
distance 000.00 In
ENTER

Max: 100.00 in Max: 2500 mm
Pivot to 4th idler Password: Service
distance 000.00 In
ENTER

Max: 100.00 in Max: 2500 mm

REC-3950 Rev G
- SC DATA SCROLL 3G -
distance 000.00 In
ENTER

Max: 100.00 in Max: 2500 mm
Only if # of weigh idlers =6:
- SC DATA SCROLL 3H -
distance 000.00 In
ENTER

Max: 100.00 in Max: 2500 mm
NOTE: All measurements must be (within 0.032 inch or 1 mm) recorded in

Determining Installation Parameters. Enter the distance with the numeric keys
and press ENTER.
Parameter LE: Pivot to test-weight height. For weighbridges which do not have
a pivot, enter zero. 3I, L, M and N only apply if test weights are provided for
calibration.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3I -
Pivot to test-weight Password: Service
height 000.00 In
ENTER +/-

REC-3950 Rev G
Default: 0.00 in Default: 0.00 mm
Min: - 20.00 in Min: - 500.0 mm
Max: + 20.00 in Max: + 500.0 mm
Parameter LC: Pivot to test-weight length. For weighbridges which do not have
a pivot, enter zero.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3L -
Pivot to test-weight Password: Service
length 000.00 In
ENTER

Max: 200.00 in Max: 5000 mm
Parameter LF: Pivot to carriage height. For weighbridges which do not have a
pivot, enter zero.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3M -
Pivot to carriage Password: Service
height 000.00 In
ENTER

Parameter LG: Carry roll to carriage height. For weighbridges which do not

REC-3950 Rev G
- SC DATA SCROLL 3N -
Roll to carriage Password: Service
height 000.00 In
ENTER

Enter the number of load cells of your weighbridge.
- SC DATA SCROLL 3O -
# of load cells Password: Service
0
ENTER
Default: 1
Min: 1
Max: 6
4. Defining Dimensional Parameters of the Application
Parameter LD: Idler spacing in scale area. For better accuracy, average the
distance between the idlers across the scale on both sides. Measure to within
0.032 inch or 1 mm with the numeric keys and press ENTER.
Idler spacing Password: Service
36.00 In
ENTER

Max: 120.00 in Max: 2500 mm

REC-3950 Rev G
Enter the angle of inclination of the belt conveyor. If an inclination meter is
connected to the scale, after this preliminary set up has been completed, enable
the automatic angle detection in I/O definition (Menu 4) and calibrate the angle
meter.
Conveyors angle Password: Service
0.0 Degrees
ENTER +/-
Default: 0.0
Min: -25 degrees
Max: + 25 degrees
5. Defining the Load Cell(s)
Enter the load cell capacity as it appears on the label placed on the load cell.
Load cell capacity Password: Service
250 Lbs
ENTER

Default: 250.0 Lbs Default: 100 kg
Min: 1 Lbs Min: 1 kg
Max: 15000 Lbs Max: 5000 kg
The sensitivity was entered when the belt scale code was entered. If other (0) was
selected, enter the load cell sensitivity in mV/V as marked on the label of the load
cell. Thermo Fisher Scientific load cells are normally 2.000 or 3.000 mV/V.
Load cell sens. Password: Service
3.000 mV/V
ENTER

REC-3950 Rev G
Default: 3.000 mV/V
Min: 0.500 mV/V
Max: 3.500 mV/V
Load cell resistance is entered on this screen. The resistance for the load cell has
been recorded on the System Data Sheet in the front of your belt scale manual. (It
is also stamped on the load cell cable.) Enter the ohms for the load cell. The
number of scrolls depends on the number of load cells specified in scroll 3O.
Load cell #1 res Password: Service
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
Default: 350 Ohms

Min: 10 Ohms
Max: 2000 Ohms
350.00 Ohms
ENTER
If # of Load Cells is 3 or more:
350.000 Ohms
ENTER

REC-3950 Rev G
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
If # of Load Cells is 6:
350.000 Ohms
ENTER
6. Defining the Speed Input
The speed input screen allows the operator to select either the single speed
sensor input (default value), the double speed sensor input (to provide extra safety
against speed sensor failure) or a simulated value using an internal timer.
In some cases, dual speed sensors are required to satisfy the local weights and
measures requirement. The Integrator averages the two inputs and alarms if either
input changes. In dual mode, the scale does not operate if one input is faulty.
Select dual (local) or dual (remote) if two speed sensors are used.
Simulation allows operation without a speed sensor. When simulated speed is

selected, a conveyor running input is required (refer to the field wiring diagram).

REC-3950 Rev G
NOTE: SPEED is selected as the third line display, the line will be blank in RUN
mode when simulated speed is selected.
Speed input
> single <
CICE ENTER
Default: SINGLE
Selections: SINGLE, DUAL, SIMULATED
7. Setting the Dead Band
The dead band is a percentage of the scale capacity (rate) in which the rate is
ignored (if any) and a zero rate is forced. Also totalization is frozen when rate is
below dead band.
Zero Dead-Band Range Password: Service
0 %
ENTER
NTEP OIML NONE

Default: 0% 0% 0%
Min: 0% 0% 0%
Max: 3% 5% 5%
NOTE: Maximum value depends upon local weights and measures regulations.
Example: NTEP Max = 3%.
8. Weights and Measures Mode (Only if Audit Trail Option is installed)
This scroll details certain parameters to conform with the approval agency
selected.
W&M mode Password: Service
> NTEP <
CHOICE ENTER

REC-3950 Rev G
Default: NTEP
Selections NONE, NTEP, OIML
Calibration Data The CAL DATA scroll allows the operator to enter or set parameters which relate to
the calibration of the scale.
1. Defining the Calibration Mode
Select which simulated method of automatic calibration is to be used. The

selected method is the only one displayed in the calibration section of Menu 1.

Calibration mode: Password: Service
> R-CAL <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: R-CAL
Selections: R-CAL, CHAIN, WEIGHTS
a. Detailing the R-CAL Parameters
This section only applies if R-CAL mode was selected as the preferred
method. Enter the resistance in ohms of the R-cal resistor installed in your
integrator. Default value installed is 165000 ohms. See the Data Sheet in front
of this manual for exact resistance.

R-CAL select. Password: Service
Res 165000 Ohms
ENTER
Default: 38313 Ohms

Min: 10 Ohms
Max: 1000000 Ohms
The system calculates the CALCON (Calibration Constant) based on the

mechanical and electrical parameters entered in Scale Data. This menu is for
reference only.

REC-3950 Rev G
R-CAL constant
00.00
MENU RUN
b. Detailing the Chains Parameters
This section only applies if CHAINS mode was selected as the preferred
method. Enter the weight per foot or meter of the chains that is used for
calibration.

Chain select. Password: Service
weight 00.000 Lb/Ft
ENTER
If ENGLISH or MIXED
Default: 0.000 Lb
Min: 0.000 Lbs/Ft
Max: 1000.000 Lbs/Ft
If METRIC
Default: 0.000 kg/m
Min: 0.000 kg/m
Max: 3000.00 kg/m

reference only.

CHAIN CAL constant Password: Service
00.00
MENU RUN
c. Detailing the Test Weight Parameters
This section only applies if TEST WEIGHTS mode was selected as the
preferred method. Enter the weight of the test weights that are used for the
calibration.

REC-3950 Rev G
Total test weight on Password: Service
scale 20.000 Lbs.
ENTER
If ENGLISH or MIXED
Default: 0.000 Lbs
Min: 0.000 Lbs
Max: Load cell size x no. of load cells
If METRIC
Default: 0.000 kg
Min: 0.000 kg
Max: Load cell size x no. of load cells

reference only.

WEIGHT CAL constant
00.00
MENU RUN
2. Entering a Calibration Interval (Only if COMM "A" option is installed)
If an optional COMM board is installed, the system can be programmed to prompt

the operator when the next calibration is due. If this option is not desired, confirm
the default 0 days interval, otherwise enter the number of days. The calibration
date displayed in Scroll 9 is automatically updated whenever a calibration is
performed. If a non zero value is entered, an alarm appears after the time is
elapsed. The alarm can only be cleared after a calibration check is executed.

Calibration interval Password: Operator
365 days
ENTER

REC-3950 Rev G
Default: 0 Days
Min: 0 Days
Max: 365 Days
This scroll displays the date of the last calibration and the expected date of the
next one, based on the entry in the previous screen.

Calibration date
Last: MM-DD-YYY
Next: MM-DD-YYY
3. Entering Material Factors
The material factor is a number in percent which is used to correct the CALCON to
the real value. Entering 0 makes the material factor INVALID.

Material FACTOR Password: Service
00.00 % R-Cal
ENTER +/- NEXT
Default: 0%
Min: -99.99 %
Max: +99.99 %
The NEXT key scrolls between the R-Cal, Weights and Chains material factors. If
they have not yet been measured, "INVALID" is displayed.
4. Defining the Calibration Test Duration
Zero and Span calibrations are more accurate if executed on an entire belt
revolution or multiple of it. Press either ACQUIRE or MANUAL, ACQUIRE is the
recommended selection. For MANUAL, see Step 7 below.

REC-3950 Rev G
Establish test
Duration
ACQ MANUAL
Select ACQuire. Acquire is the recommended selection.
a. Acquiring the Test Duration
When selecting FULL, use a 100 foot tape to measure the belt length to the
nearest 0.1 foot. Reference a fixed point (an idler) on the conveyor when
counting belt revolutions.
The PARTIAL (belt length measurement) selection enables the operator to

acquire test duration without the entire belt length measurement.
NOTE: This option should only be used when belt length exceeds 1000 feet.
ACQUIRE TEST DUR

Choose belt length
measurement method.
FULL PARTIAL
FULL is the recommended selection.
5. Full Test Duration Acquisition
If FULL is pressed, the operator is asked to enter the length of one belt revolution.
Enter the length recorded earlier. Measure belt length to the nearest 0.1 feet.
Enter length of one

belt revolution. Password: Service
Length 1000.0 Ft
ENTER ABORT

REC-3950 Rev G
Max: 10000.0 Ft Max: 3000 m
passes the reference point. Pressing ABORT returns the screen to Cal Data Scroll
11.
NOTE: The belt must be running at the maximum speed before executing this
function. If not, the pre-scaler will be improperly calculated.
Start belt. Press

START when 1st mark
passes reference.
START ABORT
NOTE: If a clip is installed and clip detector mode is set to AUTO in I/O
Definition Scroll, skip to Step 6.
When START is pressed, the system automatically moves to the next instructional
screen. The operator presses COUNT each time the mark passes the reference
point until minimum test load conditions are met (refer to the belt scale installation
manual for minimum test level requirements). When the last revolution passes the
mark, the operator must press COUNT followed by pressing DONE.
Press COUNT each

time a mark passes.
00000 secs 000 revs
COUNT ABORT DONE
When test duration is finished, the new values for length of belt and time are

REC-3950 Rev G
TEST DURATION
Length = 0000.0 Ft
Time = 000 sec
CONTINUE
6. Auto Count Belt Revolutions
If a clip detector is installed and clip detector mode in I/O Definition is set to
"AUTO", the system automatically counts belt revolutions without the need for
pressing the COUNT key. The two screens for Acquiring Test Duration are
displayed as follows:
Start belt. Wait

until 1st mark
passes reference.
ABORT
When the mark passes, the system automatically moves to the next instructional
screen. The system counts each time a mark passes the reference point until the
operator presses the DONE key.
Press DONE when

ready.
0000 secs 000 revs
ABORT DONE
7. Partial Test Duration Acquisition
CAUTION: THIS OPTION SHOULD ONLY BE USED WHEN BELT LENGTH

EXCEEDS 1000 FEET.
If PARTIAL is pressed, the operator is asked to enter the length between two
marks on the belt.
Use a 100 ft tape to measure the largest possible amount of the conveyor belt
length to the nearest .01 ft. Locate and mark a reference point on the conveyor
(idler).

REC-3950 Rev G
Enter length between
two marks on belt. Password: Service
Length: 200.0 Ft
ENTER ABORT

Max: 10000.0 Ft Max: 3000.0 m
passes the reference point.
NOTE: The belt must be running at the maximum speed before executing this
function. If not, the pre-scaler is improperly calculated.
Start belt. Press

START when 1st mark
passes reference.
START ABORT
When START is pressed, the system automatically moves to the next instructional
screen. Press COUNT when each mark passes the reference point until both
marks have passed. Then press DONE.
Press COUNT each

time a mark passes.
00000 secs 000 revs
COUNT ABORT DONE

REC-3950 Rev G
NOTE: The COUNT key is not displayed if the clip detector option is in Auto
mode.
When test duration is finished, the new values for length of belt and time are
TEST DURATIION
Length = 0000.0 Ft
Time = 000 sec
CONTINUE
8. Manual Entry of Test Duration
Prior to performing the Manual Test Duration, it is necessary to measure and time
the conveyor belt. Using a 100 ft tape, measure the entire length of the conveyor
belt to the nearest .01 ft. Place an easily identifiable mark on the conveyor belt
(paint mark) and on a reference point of the conveyor (idler). Run the belt at full
speed and carefully time one or more complete revolutions (in seconds) of the
belt. (Use a number of revolutions that will allow for a minimum test time of at least
10 minutes.)
This procedure allows direct entry of parameters that would otherwise be

generated by the acquire Test Duration modes. This menu is generally used when
the operator cannot see the belt while standing at the front panel.
If MANUAL is pressed, the system prompts the operator to run the belt at its
maximum speed. Then press CONTINUE.
Start belt. Press

CONTINUE when belt Password: Service
is at maximum speed.
ABORT CONTINUE
The operator is prompted to enter the length of one belt revolution.

REC-3950 Rev G
ENTER length of one
belt revolution. Password: Operator
Length 000.0 FT
ENTER ABORT

Max: 10000.0 Ft Max: 10000.0 m
ENTER the number of

belt revolutions to
be timed 000 revs
ENTER ABORT
Default: 1
Min: 1
Max: 100
The next entry is the time required to complete the selected number of belt
revolutions.
ENTER the time for

revolutions to pass
reference 000 sec
ENTER ABORT
Default: 30 sec
Min: 1 sec
Max: 16200 sec

REC-3950 Rev G
When ENTER is pressed, the system times the belt travel according to the above
entered parameters.
Timing belt travel

000 sec
ABORT
When test duration test is finished, the new values for length of belt and time are
TEST DURATION
Length = 000.0 Ft
Time = 000 sec
CONTINUE
9. Defining Auto Zero Tracking
A periodic auto zero procedure can be automatically executed by the system if the
Auto Zero Tracking option is set to YES. If YES is selected, Auto Zero Tracking is
enabled anytime the belt is running at a flow rate less than the range setting
selected below.

Auto zero tracking Password: Operator
> Yes <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: No
Selections Yes, No
The following scrolls are only visible if Auto Zero Tracking is enabled.
Define the range of action of the AZT with reference to the scale capacity (rate). A
flow rate greater than the range setting deactivates AZT.

REC-3950 Rev G
- CAL DATA SCROLL 12A -
auto zero tracking Password: Operator
Range 2.0 %
ENTER
NTEP OIML NONE

Default: 2% 4% 4%
Min: 0% 0% 0%
Max: 2% 10 % 10 %
Define the maximum amount of correction that each AZT can automatically
compensate. If zero error exceeds the step limit, only the step value will be zeroed
and the remainder left. The Auto Zero Step alarm will be activated. If the next AZT
completes with no remainder, the alarm will self-clear.
- CAL DATA SCROLL 12B -

Range x.xx %
ENTER
Default: 10 %
Min: 10 %
Max: 0.01 %
Define the maximum amount of zero error (with reference to the scale capacity)
that AZT can automatically compensate.
- CAL DATA SCROLL 12C -

Auto zero tracking Password: Service
Max Dev 2.0 %
ENTER
NTEP OIML NONE

Default: 2% 4% 4%
Min: 0% 0% 0%
Max: 2% 10 % 10 %

REC-3950 Rev G
Define the delay time, after a belt stoppage, before Auto Zero Track is enabled.
The AZT Z will flash for 5 seconds, then be on steady for 6 seconds to indicate
warm-up mode.
- CAL DATA SCROLL 12D -

Warm Time xxx.x Min
ENTER
Default: 0 Min
Min: 0 Min
Max: 160 Min
10. Entering the Speed Capacity
The user can ENTER the maximum speed capacity or ACQuire it. To acquire the
speed, run the belt at maximum speed and then press the ACQ key.

Max speed capacity Password: Service
200.0 Fpm
ENTER ACQ
If ENGLISH or MIXED
Default: 100.0 Fp,
Min: 1.0 Fpm
Max: 2000.0 Fpm
If METRIC
Default: 1.0 m/s
Min: 0.1 m/s
Max: 10 m/s
The maximum speed capacity is used to scale the current output when used to
monitor the speed, and to allow entering the speed alarms in %.

REC-3950 Rev G
11. Auto Zero Max Deviation
Auto Zero Max deviation sets the amount that AZT (Auto Zero Track) can adjust
from a reference (the reference is invalid after a cold start and is obtained during
the first operator assisted zero test). If an Auto Zero exceeds the max deviation,
and if the new zero is accepted, the Auto Zero Limit alarm will become active, and
logged into Audit trails. The alarm will clear if a new Auto Zero returns back to
within range or a new zero reference value is set.
CAL DATA SCROLL 14 -

Auto Zero Max Dev. Password: Service
xx.xx %
ENTER
If W&M Mode is NONE:

Default: 100%
Min: 100%
Max: 0%
If W&M Mode is NTEP:
Default: 2%
Min: 2%
Max: 0%
If W&M Mode is OIML:
Default: 4%
Min: 4%
Max: 0%
12. Zero Reference
The zero reference number is set to Invalid during a cold start. The Zero number
acquired during the first operator assisted Zero test is then set as the Zero
Reference Number. It is this value that is used to determine allowable Zero
correction limits. The Zero Reference Number can be set to the current Zero
number acquired Auto Zero Track correction number via the SET soft key. A
service password is required to change the Zero Reference.

REC-3950 Rev G
Zero Reference
xxxxxx
ENTER
Default: Invalid
Min: 120000
Max: 0
13. Defining the Number of Calibrations
This screen allows the operator to specify the number of calibrations to be

defined. If a number higher than 1 is entered, the digital inputs for calibration
selection can be defined.

Number of calib. Password: Service
1
ENTER
Default: 1
Min: 1
Max: 10
Zero Ready The Zero Ready feature provides visible indication of when the scale is not loaded,
has a valid zero calibration, and is ready to run material. This feature is a requirement
for all NTEP scales. The indication is shown on the display when the belt loading
remains under 0.12% of full scale belt loading for a period of time equivalent to one
belt revolution. The indicator is an R on the left side of line 2 of the display. The
function can be activated only after a complete scale calibration. A Zero Ready digital
output is also available, and it is active when R is displayed.

REC-3950 Rev G
00000000 TONS
R 000000 Tph
The Zero Ready feature can be turned on or off in CAL DATA SCROLL 18.

Zero Ready Password: Service
>Yes<
CHOICE ENTER
When W & M Mode (SC DATA SCROLL 11) is set to NTEP, the Zero Ready scroll
defaults to Yes. When W & M Mode is set to OIML or NONE, the Zero Ready scroll
defaults to No.
Whenever the Zero Ready scroll setting is changed an Audit Trail event is generated.
Main Menu 3 Main Menu 3 is used for protecting and unprotecting the system using passwords, and
to perform diagnostic and test functions. The diagnostic functions can only be
operated after removing all password protection, and should only be used by
experienced technical personnel. Most test functions are not password protected.
- Main MENU 3 -
Press MENU for more
PROT DIAG TEST
The PROTection menu only becomes visible after passwords have been defined (see
the Diagnostics Menu).

REC-3950 Rev G
Changing the The Micro-Tech 2000 has three protection levels to which specific passwords are
related.
Protection Level
The protection levels and the passwords are defined using the following scheme:
Protection Password Status

The system is totally unprotected; all data can be
NONE SERVICE
read or changed.
Operator functions and data are unprotected. All
LIMITED OPERATOR setup and calibration data are protected except
zero calibrate.
The system is totally protected, process data can
PROTECTED be read, no change allowed.
A SERVICE password is required to access the NONE level. An OPERATOR or a

SERVICE password is required to access the LIMITED level.
Use the NONE key to access the NONE protection level. If the current level is not
already NONE, the SERVICE password is required.
Use the LTD key to access the limited protection level. If the system is in level NONE,
change is immediate. If it is in PROT level, the SERVICE or OPERATOR password is
required. Use the PROT key to access the protected level. No password is required.
- PROTECTION LEVEL -
> NONE <
NONE LTD PROT
Default: NONE
Selections: NONE, LIMITED, PROTECTED
Password: from NONE to LTD or not required:

From PROT:
from LTD to PROT: not required
from LTD to NONE: SERVICE
from PROT to NONE: SERVICE
from PROT to LTD: OPERATOR or SERVICE
Pressing the soft key gives entry into desired level. Going from a low level to a higher
level forces the password entry.
REC-3950 Rev G
1. On Line Procedure for Changing Protection Level
The protection level can be temporarily changed by entering a password "on the
fly" during normal operation. When the operator tries to enter a variable or select a
function which is password protected, and the password is installed, the following
screen is displayed.
- SYSTEM PROTECTED -
PLEASE ENTER
PASSWORD __________
ENTER
The operator can enter either the OPERATOR or the SERVICE passwords.
However, if the operator enters the OPERATOR password and the variable or
function requires the SERVICE password instead, the access is denied and the
PLEASE ENTER SERVICE
PASSWORD __________
ENTER
If the operator fails to enter the correct password, the following screen appears.
INVALID PASSWORD
ACCESS DENIED
RETURN
Pressing RETURN returns the program to the previous function. If the operator
enters the correct password, the previous screen appears and access is allowed.
When the protection level is changed using the on line procedure, the system
automatically returns to protected status if no keyboard entries are made within 60
seconds.
Diagnostics 1. A/D Raw Data
Diagnostic Scroll 1 shows the raw data from the A/D converter of the integrator

REC-3950 Rev G
(A/D gross) and the net value after the zero constant has been subtracted. The
range of the A/D converter is from 0 to 131070 numbers.
A/D gross 00000

A/D net 0000
2. Readout Load Cell mV
The system displays the mV output of the load cell. The reading must be positive
and must increase when the load increases.
Weight on load cell Password: Service
0.000 mV
CALIB
If CALIB is pressed, the next two scrolls are displayed and can be used to fine
tune the readout of mV/V.
- DIAGNOST. SCROLL 2A -
Load cell output zero Password Service
0000000 A/D counts
ENTER
Default: 15
Min: 0
Max: 10000
- DIAGNOST. SCROLL 2B -
Load cell output span Password: Service
0000000
ENTER
Default: 3497
Min: 0

REC-3950 Rev G
Max: 30000
3. Change Pre-scaler
The pre-scaler is a number which is used to divide the incoming frequency of the
speed sensor(s) to achieve a usable input frequency of approximately 30 Hz. The
pres-caler is automatically calculated and should never be altered by the user.
However, a direct entry has been made possible for quick replacement of the
integrator.
Prescale 00000 Password: Service
00000.0 pls/min
ENTER CALIB
Default: 10
Min: 1
Max: 100
If CALIB is pressed, the following screens appear.
Test duration total Password: Service
pulses 0000000
ENTER
Default: 900
Min: 1
Max: 1000000
- DIAGNOST. SCROLL 3B -
Test duration total Password: Service
length 00000.0 ft
ENTER
If ENGLISH or MIXED:

REC-3950 Rev G
Default: 200 feet
Min: 1 feet
Max: 100000 feet
If METRIC
Default: 200 m
Min: 1m
Max: 100000 m
4. Change Passwords
The password can be changed by entering a new one. The user can enter from
one to eight characters (numeric keys entries). NTEP mode requires at least four
characters. The entered numbers are not echoed on the screen. Pressing just the
ENTER key removes the password.
ENTER SERVICE Password: Service
PASSWORD ********
ENTER
Default: No password
After the password has been entered, the system asks for confirmation. This
prevents losing access control due to a typing mistake while entering passwords.
REENTER SERVICE
PASSWORD ********
ENTER
If the password entered the second time matches the first, the following message
confirms the entry.
- DIAGNOST. SCROLL 4
NEW PASSWORD
ACQUIRED
RETURN

REC-3950 Rev G
If the two passwords do not match, the system does not accept the new
password.
DIAGNOST. SCROLL 4 -
INVALID PASSWORD
RETURN
ENTER OPERATOR Password: Operator
PASSWORD ********
MENU ENTER
Default: No Password
The OPERATOR password is double checked similarly to the service one.
It is strongly suggested to write down the password and preserve a copy in a safe
place. If the password is forgotten, refer on how to remove a forgotten password.
5. Display Software Version
The software version is displayed for reference only.
Main software
version:
33.XX.XX.XX-B1
6. Setup Date and Time
This section only applies if a COMM board is installed. The user can set the
current date and time. A battery operated clock calendar then maintains time and
date even if power is removed. Day, Month, and Year are entered in sequence.

REC-3950 Rev G
Date: MM-DD-YYYY Password: Service
DAY: DD
ENTER
Default: 00-00-0000
Min.: 01-01-0000
Max: 12-31-2096
Time is entered in a similar way. The AM/PM key is used when time is in the
English mode. See Display Scroll 7 in Main Menu 2.
Time: HH:MM
HOURS: HH
ENTER AM/PM
24 hour am/pm
Default: 00.00 01.00
Min: 00.00 01.00
Max: 23:59 12:59
7. Check Hardware Configuration
The system automatically recognizes when optional boards are installed. The
following scrolls are used to show the configuration. Remember that when a board
is acknowledged, the related information stays in memory even if the board is
removed, until the operator deletes it by responding YES to the message shown at
power on.
The following screen is displayed for each board installed in each slot.
Board type slot #1
BOARD TYPE

REC-3950 Rev G
Board type slot #2
BOARD TYPE
Board type slot #3
BOARD TYPE
Board type slot #4
BOARD TYPE
Board type slot #5
BOARD TYPE
Board type slot #5
BOARD TYPE
BOARD TYPE can be:
- Dig I/O 16in/4out Optional digital input output board.

- #16 Optocoupled Digital Inputs
- #4 Optocoupled digital outputs
- Dig I/O 16out/4in Optional digital input output board.
- #4 Optocoupled Digital Inputs
- #16 Optocoupled digital outputs
- Load Out 16in/4in Optional digital input output board dedicated to the Load
Out.

REC-3950 Rev G
- #16 Optocoupled digital inputs
- Load Out 16out/4in Optional digital input output board dedicated to the Load
Out.
- Analog I/O Optional analog input output board.
- #2 Current outputs
- #2 Voltage inputs
- Current Out Optional current output board.
- #1 Current output
- Communication A Serial communication board (RS232, RS485)
- Communication B Allen-Bradley Remote I/O
PROFIBUS-DP
8. Force Cold Start
This scroll is used to force a cold start of the instrument in the event the software
becomes corrupted. Factory default constants will be installed when the
instrument restarts; all field entry data will be replaced.
Force cold start
ENTER
Tests 1. Lamp Test
Press START to begin a Lamp Test of the integrator. All LED's and digits of the
display blink for a number of seconds.
- TEST SCROLL 1 -
LAMP TEST
START
2. Self Test of the Unit
The system can perform some internal test functions, which can be used to detect
malfunctions to the hardware devices.

REC-3950 Rev G
- TEST SCROLL 2 -
Internal test of Password: Service
microprocessor.
START
After START is pressed, the following screens are displayed in sequence.
- TEST SCROLL 2A -
Testing ROM
Test PASSED
- TEST SCROLL 2B -
Testing RAM
Test PASSED
The message "Test PASSED" is displayed if the test runs correctly. If something
wrong is detected, then the message "Test FAILED" is displayed, and the soft key
CONTINUE is shown. The operator has to press the key to go on to the next test.
NOTE: Test 2C requires a hardware jumper to be installed between serial in and

serial out pins of the mother board. Since the jumper is not normally in place, a
Test FAILED message at the end of Test 2C is normally displayed.
3. Test Digital Inputs
The next screen is used to check the digital input circuitry. The display shows a 1
if the specific input is closed, 0 if open. If more digital I/O boards are installed, the
NEXT soft key appears, allowing the operator to scroll between boards.
- TEST SCROLL 3 -
Dig input test
Slot #0 ----000-
NEXT
Slots are numbered 1 to 6. Slot 0 is the mother board. Inputs are shown from right
to left. If a board has 16 inputs, two screens are used to show the first and the
second half, the lower half is shown first.

REC-3950 Rev G
4. Test Digital Outputs
This test shows the status of each digital output and allows the operator to force
the output for testing purposes. The output, when forced, stays on until the
CLEAR soft key is pressed or the Run Menu is entered. If an output is forced and
the scroll key is used for reaching some other menu, the output stays in the forced
status until RUN is pressed. This allows the operator to check inputs while outputs
are still in the forced status.
- TEST SCROLL 4 -
Dig output test Password: Service
output #1 : ON/OFF
ENTER ON/OFF
To force an output, enter the desired number followed by ENTER. Then use the
ON/OFF key to force it to the ON or OFF status. After the output has been forced,
the CLEAR soft key appears in the middle position.
Slots are numbered 1 to 6; slot 0 is the mother board.
WARNING: FORCING THE DIGITAL OUTPUTS MAY CAUSE MACHINERY TO

START. AFTER THE USER TRIES TO FORCE AN OUTPUT, THE FOLLOWING
MESSAGE WILL BE DISPLAYED.
WARNING
EQUIPMENT MAY START
CONTINUE ABORT
WARNING: IF THE USER PRESSES CONTINUE, BE AWARE THE ACTION MAY

CAUSE DAMAGE OR INJURY. IF THE USER PRESSES ABORT, THE SYSTEM
WILL RETURN TO THE PREVIOUS SCROLL.
5. Test Current Outputs
This section only applies if a current output board is detected. The integrator can
have one or two current output channels.

REC-3950 Rev G
- TEST SCROLL 5 -
Current output #1 Password: Service
should be 00.0 mA
ENTER CLEAR
Default: 0.00 mA
Min: 0.0 mA
Max: 20.0 mA
To force the output, enter the desired number of milliamps and press ENTER.
Press CLEAR to free the mA channel.
If the board has two channels, the following screen is shown.
- TEST SCROLL 6 -
Current output #2 Password: Service
should be 00.0 mA
ENTER CLEAR
Default: 0.0 mA
Min: 0.0 mA
Max: 20.0 mA
6. Test Current Inputs
The following screen is displayed only if an analog input board is detected, and
shows the status of each analog input channel.
- TEST SCROLL 7 -
Voltage input
#1 00.0 V
#2 00.0 V
7. Test Communication A
The following screen allows checking the installed serial lines. Maximum line
number is 2; they can be used for printing or high level communications. "Port 1"
REC-3950 Rev G
and "Port 2" soft keys are shown only if a first and second COMM board is
detected.
- TEST SCROLL 8 -
Test communication A Password: Service
PORT 1 PORT 2
By pressing the PORT 1 or the PORT 2 soft key, the test is initiated. A test pattern
is sent out on the TX output and read on the RX input. If the test fails, the
message "Test Failed" is shown; otherwise, the message "Test Passed" is
displayed.
NOTE: This test requires a hardware jumper to be installed between terminals

TB5-8 (RX) and TB5-9 (TX) on the communication board.
8. Test Communication B
This test is similar to the previous one but works for the field bus version of the
communication board.
- TEST SCROLL 9 -
Test communication B Password: Service
START
9. Test Load Out or DIO Input Board
If an optional Load Out or DIO input card is detected, the following screen
appears. The test is similar to the digital input test.
- TEST SCROLL 10 -
BCD Input test
0000
10. Test Load Out or DIO Output Board
The following test is displayed if an optional load out or DIO output board is
detected.

REC-3950 Rev G
- TEST SCROLL 11 -
BCD Output test
0000
ENTER CLEAR
Default: 0
Min.: 0
Max: 9999 or 7999 if parity check enabled
To force the outputs, enter a number followed by ENTER. The CLEAR key
appears indicating that the output is being forced to a value. By pressing CLEAR,
the output is freed.
11. Test the CPU Serial Line
- TEST SCROLL 12 -
Test CPU serial line Password: Service
START
If START is pressed, the system performs a test of the serial line of the CPU
board.
NOTE: The CPU serial line is not implemented in the current hardware, therefore
the normal response is TEST FAILED.
12. Test the Keyboard and Switches
- TEST SCROLL 13 -
Keyboard + switches
Key: _________
Switches: 00000000
Press the RUN key twice to exit. All other keys, including MENU, are displayed but
not executed.

REC-3950 Rev G
Main Menu 4 Main Menu 4 is dedicated to the definition of the input output (I/O) and alarms.
- MAIN MENU 4 -
Press MENU for more
I/O ALARMS
DEFINE DEFINE
I/O Definition The input output section of the system is fully configurable. All inputs and outputs are
conventionally numbered and can be assigned to physical input and output terminals
depending on the needs. The following section explains how to configure I/O.
However, the standard configuration as provided by the factory is normally
satisfactory.
1. Define Current Outputs
The following menus are shown for configuring the current output(s). Use the
CHOICE key to change the variable and the ENTER key to confirm. The NEXT
key allows the operator to set up to four (4) current outputs if installed.
- I/O DEF SCROLL 1 -

Current Output define Password: Service
#1 > Rate <
CHOICES ENTER NEXT
Default: (1st) RATE, (2nd) LOAD

Selections: OFF, RATE, LOAD, SPEED
If the selection of the previous screen is not OFF, the operator can set up the
range, delay and damping of the current output. The range is selectable between
the standard 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA both in direct and reverse mode. Select
0-20 or 4-20 if an increase in current is desired for any increase of the variable.
Select 20-0 or 20-4 if a decrease of current is desired for any increase of the
variable.
- I/O DEF SCROLL 1A -

Current out range Password: Service
#1 > 4-20 mA <
CHOICES ENTER NEXT

REC-3950 Rev G
Default: (1st) 4-20 mA, (2nd) 4-20 mA, (3rd) 4-20 mA, (4th) 4-20 mA
Selections: 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA, 20-0 mA, 20-4 mA
Each current output can be delayed. This is typically needed in blending systems,
to correct transport time differences. The delay can be set either in time or in
length of belt travel. Belt travel is suggested for variable speed applications. Use
the T/L soft key to switch between time and length.
- I/O DEF SCROLL 1B -

Current out delay Password: Service
#1 0 sec
ENTER T/L NEXT
Default: (1st) 0 sec, (2nd) 0 sec, (3rd ) 0 sec, (4th) 0 sec

If TIME: Min: 0 sec
Max: 300 sec
If LENGTH
English Min: (1st) 0 Ft, (2nd) 0 Ft, (3rd) 0 Ft, (4th) 0 Ft
Max: 10000 Ft
Metric Min: 0M
Max: 300 M
A damping factor can also be selected for each current channel. The damping
factor is the time for the output to stabilize after a step change. This damping only
affects the current output, not the displayed variable, which has a separate
damping factor, selectable in Main Menu 2, Display.
- I/O DEF SCROLL 1C -

Current out damping Password: Operator
#1 4
ENTER NEXT
Default: (1st) 4 sec, (2nd) 4 sec, (3rd) 4 sec, (4th) 4 sec

Min: 0 sec
Max: 400 sec

REC-3950 Rev G
UP and DOWN arrows move between range, delay and damping. NEXT moves to
the next current output.
2. Define Analog Inputs
NOTE. The analog input hardware is factory configured for current (0-20 mA) in
utilizing a shunt (W3 or W4) and 250 ohm resistor (R-21 and R-22 or R-28 and R-
29) across the input. To use with a voltage input (0-5 VDC), the corresponding
shunt (W3 for Input #1 or W4 for Input #2) must be cut.
If an analog input board is installed, the following screens are displayed. Analog
inputs can be used for measuring the moisture of the material or conveyor angle
of inclination.
Moisture compensation is performed on the belt loading, and affects both rate and
totals. Only during material calibration with material is moisture compensation
suspended, so that the totalized quantity can be directly compared to the weight
obtained on a static scale. The moisture compensation is executed before adding
to total.
Angle compensation dynamically adjusts span when conveyor inclination

changes. Use the CHOICES key to select the action of the analog input, use
ENTER to confirm, use CALIB to calibrate the analog input signal.

Analog Input #1 def. Password: Service
> Inclination <
CHOICES ENTER CALIB
Default: OFF
Selections: OFF, INCLIN(ATION), MOISTURE

Analog Input #2 deaf. Password: Service
> Moisture <
CHOICES ENTER CALIB
Default: OFF
Selections: OFF, INCLIN(ATION), MOISTURE
a. Setup Moisture Compensation Input

REC-3950 Rev G
If an analog input has been programmed for reading the moisture signal and
CALIB was pressed, the following screens appear. The user can calibrate the
input signal by entering the equivalence between percent of moisture and
voltage on two points. Use the %Moist key to enter the percent of moisture,
use the Volt key to enter the corresponding number of volts, and confirm with
ENTER.

Moisture input calibr. Password: Service
0.0 %M = 2.0 v
ENTER %Moist Volt
Default: 0.00 % 0.0 V

Min: 0.0 % 0.0 V
Max: 20.0 % 2.5 V
Do the same with the second point shown below.

Moisture input calibr. Password: Service
20.0 %M = 5.0 V
ENTER %Moist Volt
Default: 20.0 % 5.0 V

Min: 1.0 % 1.0 V
Max: 20.0 % 5.0 V
b. Setup Inclination Compensation Input
If an analog input has been programmed for reading the angle signal and
CALIB was pressed, the following screens appear. The user can calibrate the
input signal by entering the number of degrees corresponding to the minimum
signal (0 mA or 4 mA) and the number of degrees corresponding to the
maximum signal (20 mA). Use the +/- key to enter negative numbers, and
confirm with ENTER.

REC-3950 Rev G
Conveyor low posit Password: Service
00.0 Degrees
ENTER +/-
Default: 0.00 Degrees

Min: - 25 Degrees
Max: + 25 Degrees

Conveyor high posit Password: Service
00.0 Degrees
ENTER +/-
Default: 0.0 Degrees

Min: - 25 Degrees
Max: + 25 Degrees
3. Define Digital Inputs
Digital inputs can be programmed. The following screen shows one logical
function per time, and allows the user to assign it to a physical input. The NEXT
key scrolls between the logical functions. The NC/NO key selects the Normally
Open (NO) or Normally Closed (NC) status of the input. Normally Open means
the input is inactive when disconnected. To program a function, scroll with NEXT
until the function is displayed, then enter the physical input number and confirm
with ENTER, finally scroll with NC/NO until the desired mode is displayed. By
assigning a function to 0, the function is disabled.
I/O DEF SCROLL 4 -

Dig. Input def. Password Service
Ext Alarm 1 0 NC
ENTER NC/NO NEXT
The following table shows the available logical selections that can be assigned to
any available physical input. Default inputs can be reassigned to any physical

REC-3950 Rev G
input if desired. External alarms 1, 2 and 3 can be assigned to logical functions
not on the list.
Logical selections should not be reassigned after the physical inputs have been
wired.
CAUTION: LOGICAL INPUTS RETURN TO THE DEFAULT IF THE INTEGRATOR

IS COLD STARTED.
Selections: Default:
External alarm 1 0 NO 0 = function disabled
External alarm 2 0 NO
External alarm 3 0 NO
Print 4 NO (Only if COMM installed
& set to PRINTER)
Belt Running (Conveyor run) 3 NC
Reset Totals 0 NO
Reset Alarms 0 NO
Auto Zero 0 NO (Only if AZT enabled)
Clip Detector 0 NO
Batch Start 0 NO (Only if Load Out installed)
Batch Stop 0 NO (Only if Load Out installed)
Batch Standby 0 NO (Only if Load Out installed)
Cal.Sel. 1 0-NO
Cal.Sel. 2 0-NO
Cal.Sel. 3 0-NO
Cal.Sel. 4 0-NO
Cal.Sel. 5 0-NO
Cal.Sel. 6 0-NO
Cal.Sel. 7 0-NO
Cal.Sel. 8 0-NO
Cal.Sel. 9 0-NO
One non assignable belt speed input and three assignable inputs are standard on
the mother board.

REC-3950 Rev G
MOTHER BOARD INPUTS
PHYSICAL ASSIGNED FUNCTION FIELD PANEL

INPUT MOUNT MOUNT
NUMBER
1 BELT SPEED INPUT TB9 2, 4 & 5 TB2 1, 2 & 3
2 TB8 13 & 14 TB2 5 & 7
3 TB8 11 & 12 TB2 8 & 10
4 TB8 9 & 10 TB2 9 & 10
Additional assignable logical inputs from the above table can be selected
by adding optional I/O boards. Available options are 4in/16out, 16in/4out
or 20in/20out by adding both boards.
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD INPUTS

INSTALLED OPTIONS
PHYSICAL ASSIGNED 4IN/16OUT 16IN/4OUT 4IN/16OUT
INPUT FUNCTION ONLY ONLY AND
NUMBER 16IN/4OUT
5 J15 2 J16 - 17 J15 - 2
6 J15 - 15 J16 5 J15 - 15
7 J15 3 J16 18 J15 - 3
8 J15 - 16 J16 6 J15 16
9 J16 19 J16 17
10 J16 7 J16 5
11 J16 20 J16 18
12 J16 8 J16 6
13 J16 21 J16 19

REC-3950 Rev G
14 J16 9 J16 7
15 J16 22 J16 20
16 J16 10 J16 8
17 J16 23 J16 21
18 J16 11 J16 9
19 J16 24 J16 22
20 J16 12 J16 10
21 J16 23
22 J16 11
23 J16 24
24 J16 - 12
WARNING: CHANGING THE DEFINITION OF THE DIGITAL INPUTS MAY CAUSE

MACHINERY TO START. AFTER THE USER TRIES TO CHANGE A DEFINITION,
THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED.
WARNING
EQUIPMENT MAY START
CONTINUE ABORT
WARNING: IF THE USER PRESSES CONTINUE, BE AWARE THE ACTION MAY

CAUSE DAMAGE OR INJURY. IF THE USER PRESSES ABORT, THE SYSTEM
4. Define Digital Outputs
Digital outputs can be programmed. The following screen shows one logical
function per time, and allows the user to assign it to a physical output. The NEXT
key scrolls between the logical functions. The NC/NO key selects the Normally
Open (NO) or Normally Closed (NC) status of the output. Normally Open means

REC-3950 Rev G
the output is not energized in normal conditions. To program a function, scroll with
NEXT until the function is displayed, then enter the number of the physical output
and confirm with ENTER, finally scroll with NC/NO until the desired mode is
displayed. By assigning a function to 0, the function is disabled.

Dig. Output def. Password: Service
Alarm: 0 NC
ENTER NC/NO NEXT
The following table shows the available logical selections that can be assigned to
any available physical output. Typical field wiring drawings and customer specific
field wiring drawings show Ready defaulted to #1 NO, Out of Range defaulted to
#2 NO and Totalizer (remote counter) defaulted to #3 NO. Default selections can
be reassigned to any physical output if desired.
Logical selections should not be reassigned after the physical outputs have been
wired.
CAUTION: LOGICAL SELECTIONS RETURN TO THE DEFAULT IF THE

INTEGRATOR IS COLD STARTED.
Selections: Default:
Alarm 0 NC
Shut down 0 NO
Ready 0 NC
High Load 0 NO (Only if Load Alarm enabled)
Low Load 0 NO (Only if Load Alarm enabled)
High Rate 0 NO (Only if Rate Alarm enabled)
Low Rate 0 NO (Only if Rate Alarm enabled)
High Speed 0 NO (Only if Speed Alarm enabled)
Low Speed 0 NO (Only if Speed Alarm enabled)
Deviation Alarm 0 NC (Output becomes active if high or low rate exceeds the
setpoint. Rate alarms must be set to alarm in alarm scroll #5 Alarm Definitions.
Assign physical output to any unused output in I/O Alarm Output Scroll. Deviation
Alarm is not self-clearing.)
Out of Range 2 NO (Output becomes active if high or
low rate exceeds the setpoint. Rate

REC-3950 Rev G
alarms do not have to be assigned in alarm scroll #5
Alarm Definitions. Out of Range alarm is self-
clearing.)
Print Ready 1 NO (Print is inhibited at flow rates
greater than 3% of maximum scale
capacity if NTEP is selected in
Scale Data Scroll #12 W & M
mode.)
Totalizer 3 NO
Batch Preset 0 NO (Only if Load Out installed)

Batch 0 NO (Only if Load Out installed)
Print Ready 0 NO (Only if W & M selected)
Load WTS (weights) 0-NO
Zero Ready 5 NO
One non assignable Fault output and three assignable outputs are standard on
the mother board.
MOTHER BOARD OUTPUTS
PHYSICAL ASSIGNED FUNCTION FIELD PANEL

OUTPUT # MOUNT MOUNT
FAULT OUTPUT TB8 1 & 2 TB2 15 & 16
1 TB8 7 & 8 TB2 12 & 16
2 TB8 5 & 6 TB2 13 & 16
3 TB8 3 & 4 TB2 14 & 16
Additional assignable logical selections from the above table can

be selected by adding optional I/O boards. Available options are
4in/16out, 16in/4out or 20in/20out by adding both boards.

REC-3950 Rev G
DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT BOARD INPUTS
INSTALLED OPTIONS
PHYSICAL ASSIGNED 4IN/16OUT 16IN/4OUT 4IN/16OUT
OUTPUT FUNCTION ONLY ONLY AND
NUMBER 16IN/4OUT
4 J15 17 J16 - 2 J16 - 2
5 J15 18 J16 15 J16 - 15
6 J15 6 J16 3 J16 - 3
7 J15 19 J16 16 J16 - 16
8 J15 19 J15 17
9 J15 7 J15 5
10 J15 20 J15 18
11 J15 8 J15 6
12 J15 21 J15 19
13 J15 9 J15 7
14 J15 22 J15 20
15 J15 10 J15 8
16 J15 23 J15 21
17 J15 11 J15 9
18 J15 24 J15 22
19 J15 12 J15 10
20 J15 23
21 J15 11
22 J15 24
23 J15 12

REC-3950 Rev G
WARNING: CHANGING THE DEFINITION OF THE DIGITAL OUTPUTS MAY
CAUSE MACHINERY TO START. AFTER THE USER TRIES TO CHANGE A
DEFINITION, THE FOLLOWING MESSAGE IS DISPLAYED.
WARNING
EQUIPMENT MAY START
CONTINUE ABORT
WARNING: IF THE USER PRESSES CONTINUE, BE AWARE THE ACTIONMAY

CAUSE DAMAGE OR INJURY. IF THE USER PRESSES BORT, THE SYSTEM
5. Define Remote Totalizer Output
If the TOTALIZER output function is assigned to an output, the following

screens allow the user to set up related parameters. Set the divider according
to the maximum rate the scale will run. The divider is entered in totalization
units (T.U.). The pulse frequency generated in normal conditions should not
exceed 10 Hz. Higher frequencies are possible. However, they do not improve
accuracy.

Remote counter div. Password: Service
1_
ENTER
Default: 1
Min: 0.01
Max: 100
Enter the pulse width in seconds of the totalizer. A higher pulse width limits the
maximum frequency. The default 0.1 sec. is recommended for frequencies
lower than 5 Hz.

Remote counter pulse Password: Service
width 0.100 sec
ENTER

REC-3950 Rev G
Default: 0.1 sec
Min: 0.005 sec
Max: 1 sec
6. Define Load Out Output Data
If an optional load out board is installed, the user can select the related
variable.

BCD Output variable Password: Service
> Rate <
CHOICES ENTER
Default: OFF
Selections: OFF, RATE, LOAD, SPEED
If a selection other than OFF is made, the following screens allow the user to
define the polarity and the parity check of the BCD output. The polarity
selection reverses the signals from NO to NC and vice versa. If a parity criteria
is selected, the most significant bit of the BCD output is used for parity check.

BCD Output polarity Password: Service
> Positive <
CHOICES ENTER
Default: NEGATIVE
Selections: POSITIVE, NEGATIVE

BCD Output parity Password: Service
> Yes <
CHOICES ENTER
Default: NO
Selections: NO, YES

REC-3950 Rev G
7. Define Load Out Input Data
If an optional load out input board is installed, the following screens allow the
user to define the related variable and the polarity of the signals.

BCD Input variable Password: Service
> Load out setpoint <
CHOICES ENTER
Default: OFF
Selections: OFF, BATCH PRE-ACT, BATCH SETPOINT
Only if load out input is not set to OFF:

BCSD input polarity Password: Service
> Positive <
CHOICES ENTER
Default: NEGATIVE
Selections: NEGATIVE, POSITIVE
8. Clip Detector Option
The clip detector option reduces flow rate errors on light loaded belts caused by
conveyor belt weight variances. Turning on Auto Zero Tracking in the Cal Data
Scroll enables the clip detector. The clip detector is normally a proximity switch
that senses a metal target attached to the belt. In manual mode, the clip detector
freezes the flow rate when the clip is detected and maintains it frozen for the
programmed length. Totalization is not affected. In automatic, the Integrator
automatically detects tare variations and compensates for them.
If the clip detector is assigned to one digital I/O input, the following screens
appear.

Clip detector mode Password: Service
MANUAL
CHOICE ENTER

REC-3950 Rev G
Default: MANUAL
Selections: MANUAL, AUTO
In the MANUAL mode, the user must enter the length of belt which is affected by
the belt splice. The system freezes the belt loading when the clip is detected and
maintains it frozen until the specified belt length has passed.

Clip detect length Password: Service
00.00 ft
ENTER

Min: 0.5 Ft Min: 0.10 m
Max: 10 Ft Max: 3.00 m
If the AUTO mode is selected, the system automatically detects belt weight
variations and compensates for them. The Auto Zero Tracking then stores in
memory a table of tare values which are used to compensate the tare variations
point by point. In addition, when the Acquire Test Duration is run in the ACQ
FULL mode, the COUNT key is not displayed because the system automatically
counts the clip detector pulses. (For proper operation, there can only be one clip
used for the entire belt length.)
9. Define Load WTS (Weights)
This feature activates a lowering/lifting mechanism for automatically loading and

unloading the scale with test weights, when the auto span function is initiated
from remote.
Alarms Definition The alarms of the Micro-Tech 2000 can be programmed. Process alarms such as low
and high rate can be set to the desired range. In addition, all alarms can be defined
to be:
ALARM When an alarm occurs, the front panel ALARM status indicator
illuminates. An ALARM message flashes in the lower, right hand
RUN display. Pressing ALARM displays the alarm. Time and date
are also displayed if the optional COMM board is installed.
Pressing RESET clears the alarm message if the alarm parameter

has cleared. If the alarm parameter has not cleared, the message
"ACK" appears when RESET is pressed. When the alarm parameter

REC-3950 Rev G
clears, the alarm indication clears.
Pressing RUN at any time returns the operator to the RUN menu.
Alarms can be automatically printed if the print option is enabled.
SHUTDOWN The alarm handler operates as above except the READY status
indicator goes off and the SHUTDOWN physical output changes
state at the same time as the ALARM status indicator comes on.
In the I/O definition scroll, alarm and ready can be assigned to N/C
or N/O physical outputs. The output activates and deactivates at the
same time as the front panel status indicators.
NONE Alarm is deactivated.
1. Define Rate Alarm
Use the CHOICE key to turn on or off the rate alarm. Confirm with ENTER.
- ALARM SCROLL 1 -
Rate Alarm Password: Operator
> YES <
CHOICE ENTER
NTEP OIML NONE

Default: YES NO NO
Selections: YES, NO
If the selection in the previous screen was YES, enter the low and high setpoints
for the alarm. Also enter the desired delay time before the alarm is monitored.
The UNITS key allows the user to specify the set points in engineering units. The
% key selects set points in percent. The SET/DLY switches between the setpoint
and the delay time.
- ALARM SCROLL 1A -
Low rate set Password: Operator
35 % 10 sec
ENTER SET/DELAY
UNITS/%

REC-3950 Rev G
NTEP OIML NONE
Default: 35% 10% 10%
Min: 0% 0% 0%
Max: 105% 105% 105%
- ALARM SCROLL 1B -
High rate set Password: Operator
98 % 10 sec
ENTER SET/DELAY
UNITS/%
NTEP OIML NONE

Default: 98% 100% 100%
Min : 0% 0% 0%
Max: 150% 150% 150%
2. Define Load Alarm
Use the CHOICE key to turn on or off the belt loading alarm. Confirm with
ENTER.
- ALARM SCROLL 2 -
Load Alarm Password: Operator
> BI <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NO
Selections: YES, NO
If the selection in the previous screen was YES, enter the low and high set points
The UNITS key allows the user to specify the set points in engineering units, the
% key selects percent. The SET/DLY switches between the setpoint and the
delay time.

REC-3950 Rev G
- ALARM SCROLL 2A -
Low load set Password: Operator
10 % 10 sec
ENTER SET/DELAY
UNITS/%
Default: 10% 10 sec

Min: 0% 0 sec
Max: 105% 90 sec
- ALARM SCROLL 2B -
High load set Password: Operator
100 % 10 sec
ENTER SET/DELAY
UNITS/%
Default: 10% 10 sec

Min: 0% 0 sec
Max: 150% 90 sec
3. Define Speed Alarm
Use the CHOICE key to turn on or off the belt speed alarm. Confirm with ENTER.
- ALARM SCROLL 3 -
Speed Alarm Password: Operator
> NO <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NO
Selections: YES, NO
If the selection in the previous screen was YES, enter the low and high set points
The UNITS key allows the user to specify the set points in engineering units,
the% key selects percent. The SET/DLY switches between the setpoint and the
delay time.

REC-3950 Rev G
- ALARM SCROLL 3A -
Low speed set Password: Operator
10 % 10 sec
ENTER SET/DELAY
UNITS/%
Default: 10% 10 sec

Min: 0% 0 sec
Max: 105% 90 sec
- ALARM SCROLL 3B -
High speed set Password: Operator
100 % 10 sec
ENTER SET/DELAY
UNITS/%
Default: 100% 10 sec

Min: 0% 0 sec
Max: 150% 90 sec
If the Speed Mode that was defined in Main Menu 2, Scale Data, is DUAL, the
user has to enter the maximum acceptable difference in percent between the two
speed inputs, and the delay time before the alarm is generated.
-- ALARM SCROLL 4A -
Belt slip set Password: Operator
1% 10 sec
ENTER SET/DELAY
UNITS/%
Default: 1% 10 sec
Min: 0% 0 sec
Max: 100% 90 sec
4. Setup Alarm Modes
The following message is displayed for three seconds.

REC-3950 Rev G
- ALARM SCROLL 5 -
- ALARM DEFINITION -
Use NEXT key or
enter alarm number
After three seconds, the following screen is displayed. The user can use the
CHOICE soft key to select the desired mode between ALARM (just a warning
message), SHUT DOWN (Warning plus fault output) and NONE (no action).
Confirm with ENTER. Use the NEXT key to scroll between alarms, or enter the
alarm number.
ALARM NUMBER # 1
Clock Fail
set as ALARM
CHOICE ENTER NEXT
Alarms are listed in Chapter 4.0 Maintenance.
Main Menu 5 Main Menu 5 is dedicated to the serial options. COMM A is used to set up the serial
line of the optional board Communication A, and PRINT is used for setting up the
printer output. Main Menu 5 does not appear unless an optional COMM A is installed.
- MAIN MENU 5 -
Press MENU for more
COMM A PRINT
Communication A The communication board A has one serial channel, which can be configured using
jumpers as an RS232 or an RS485 channel. The serial channel can be used for
Scroll
printing or for a serial communication with an intelligent device such as a PLC or a
PC. Two COMM A boards can be installed and programmed, typically one for the
printer and one for the supervisor.
The following screens define the communication parameters for the first and the
second channel.

REC-3950 Rev G
- COMM. A SCROLL 1 -
Baud rate port #1 Password: Service
> 9600 <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: 9600
Selections: 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
Set parity port #1 Password: Service
> No parity <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NO PARITY
Selections: EVEN PARITY, ODD PARITY, NO PARITY
Stop bits port #1 Password: Service
1 stop bit <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: 1 STOP BIT

Selections: 1 STOP BIT, 2 STOP BITS
Wordlength port #1 Password: Service
> 8 bits <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: BITS
Selections: 7 BITS, 8 BITS
Some commonly used protocols are implemented in the system. See Communication
Protocols, REC 3949, for the details. Possible selections are:

REC-3950 Rev G
PC-MASTER Thermo Fisher Scientific proprietary
protocol: Multi Drop, Master Slave
SIEMENS 3964R A proprietary protocol of Siemens.

Point to point, Multi Master
ALLEN BRADLEY DF1 A proprietary protocol of Allen-
Bradley. Multi Drop, Master Slave.
MODBUS A proprietary protocol of AEG. Multi
Drop, Master Slave.
PRINTER Not a protocol, selects printer output.
Protocol port #1 Password: Service
> MODBUS <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: MODBUS
Selections: PC-MASTER, SIEMENS 3964R, ALLEN BRADLEY DF1,
MODBUS, PRINTER, AUTO-MAT
If the selected protocol is not PRINTER, the following screens define the ADDRESS
of the device in the multi drop line, and the access permission from the remote
supervisor. If NONE is selected, the supervisor has full access to the device. If
LIMITED is selected, the supervisor only accesses those variables that are
accessible with the OPERATOR password. If PROTECTED is selected, the unit is
write protected.
- COMM. A SCROLL 5A -
Clear to send #1 Password: Service
> disabled <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: DISABLED
Selections: DISABLED, ENABLED
Address port #1 Password: Service
1___
ENTER

REC-3950 Rev G
Default: 1
Min: 1
Max: 255
Access prot. port #1 Password: Service
> None <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NONE
Selections: NONE, LIMITED, PROTECTION
If a second communication board is installed, the following screen appears. These

screens operate exactly as the ones dedicated to the communication board 1.
Baud rate port #2 Password: Service
> 2400 <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: 9600
Selections: 110, 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200
Set parity port #2 Password: Service
> No parity <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NO PARITY
Selections: NO PARITY, EVEN PARITY, ODD PARIT
Stop bits port #2 Password: Service
> 1 stop bit <
CHOICE ENTER

REC-3950 Rev G
Default: 1 STOP BIT
Selections: 1 STOP BIT, 2 STOP BITs
Wordlength port #2 Password: Service
> 8 bits <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: 8 BITS
Selections: 7 BITS, 8 BITS
Protocol port #2 Password: Service
> PRINTER <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: PRINTER
Selections: PC MASTER, SIEMENS 3964R, ALLEN BRADLEY DF1,
MODBUS, PRINTER
Only if protocol of port #2 is not PRINTER:
- COMM A. SCROLL 12A -

Clear to send #2 Password: Service
> Disabled <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: DISABLED
Selections: DISABLED, ENABLED
Address port #2 Password: Service
1__
ENTER

REC-3950 Rev G
Default: 1
Min: 1
Max: 255
Access prot. port #2 Password: Service
> None <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NONE
Selections: NONE, LIMITED, PROTECTED
Print The Micro-Tech 2000 has a fully programmable printer format. The following section
explains how to program it according to the specific needs.
1. Define Handshaking
The system can be configured to operate without any handshake (NONE), or

using the Clear to Send signal (CTS) or the XON-XOFF sequence. Refer to the
printer instruction manual to define which selection is required. The selection
NONE is only used for testing purposes. It is not recommended for normal use. If
NONE is selected, the system is not able to recognize if the printer is on line or
not, or if the paper is empty.
The most commonly used protocol is the CTS, which is a signal generated by the
printer to indicate whether it is ready to receive data or not.
- PRINTER SCROLL 1-
Handshaking Password: Service
> None <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NONE
Selections: NONE, CTS, XON-OFF
Different printers use different end of line patterns. Select the one you need for
your printer.

REC-3950 Rev G
- PRINTER SCROLL 2 -
End of line Password: Service
> CR <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: CR
Selections: CR, LF, CR+LF
Some printers cannot accept characters while they are printing. In some cases,
the handshake is not well controlled by the printer, so a delay at end of line is
helpful.
Delay end of line Password: Service
0 sec
ENTER
Default: 0 sec
Min: 0 sec
Max: 5 sec
A form feed character can be sent to the printer after each report to force the
printer to eject the paper. If NO is selected, a normal END OF LINE character(s)
is printed at the end of the report.
Form Feed Password: Service
> NO
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NO
Selections: NO, YES
2. Periodical Printing
If you want to generate periodical printing, enter the number of minutes, hours or
days in the following screen. By entering 0, the periodical printing is prevented.

REC-3950 Rev G
Use the INTV key to switch from minutes to hours and to days.
Print interval Password: Operator
0 min
ENTER INTV
Default: 0 min
Min: o min, 0 hour, 0 days
Max: 59 min, 23 hour, 365 days
The system can print at specific times during the day. Enter the time you want to
obtain the printing. Use the NEXT key to scroll between the print times (maximum
4). The ON/OFF key enables or disables the displayed print time.
Print time #1 Password: Operator
time HH:MM
ENTER ON/OFF NEXT
if 24 hours If am/pm
Default: OFF OFF
Min: 00:00 01:00
Max: 23:59 12:59
3. Define Print Format
By selecting YES in the following screen, the system is instructed to print one line
each time a new alarm condition occurs. The alarm is printed as follows:
xx-xx-xxxx yy:yyz
kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk
where:
xx-xx-xxxx Day, Month, Year, printed according to the local

format as defined in Main Menu 2 Display
Scroll of this Appendix.

REC-3950 Rev G
yy:yyz Hour, Minutes, am/pm printed according to the
local format as defined in Main Menu 2 - Display
Scroll of this Appendix.
kkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkkk Alarm message, same message appearing on the

screen
For example:
11-22-1998 8:14a
Clock Fail
Print alarms Password: Service
> No <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: NO
Selections: YES, NO
There are three ways for defining the printing format. The first two are predefined
formats, which are as follows:
DEFAULT 1
TOTALS REPORT
DATE: 11-22-1998
TIME: 8:12a
MASTER TOTAL: 0.00 Tons

RESET TOTAL: 0.00 Tons
OPERATOR TOTAL: 0.00 Tons
RATE: 0.00 TPH
DEFAULT 2
DATE: 11-22-1998
TIME: 8:12a
MASTER START TOTAL: 0.00 Tons

MASTER STOP TOTAL: 0.00 Tons
QUANTITY: 0.00 Tons
The format DEFAULT 2" is preselected when the weights and measures choice
REC-3950 Rev G
is NTEP.
The third way is to define your own format using the printer setup screens listed
below.
Select DEFAULT if you want the predefined format. Select USER DEFINED if
you want to set up your own format.
Total report format Password: Service
> Default 2 <
CHOICE ENTER
NTEP OIML NONE

Default: DEFAULT 2 DEFAULT 1 DEFAULT 1
Selections: DEFAULT 1 DEFAULT 2 USER DEFINED
If your selection is USER DEFINED, the following screens are displayed.
First, define the number of strings that you want to add to your report. You can
enter a number from 1 to 3. Strings can be used to add the company name as
well as other information that you want to include in the print format.
- PRINTER SCROLL 9A -
Number of strings Password: Operator
3
ENTER
Default: 1
Min: 0
Max: 3
If you specified a number of strings larger than zero, you can now enter the
strings. Use the alphanumeric keypad, pressing the numeric key corresponding
to the letter that you want to type. Every time you press a new key, the cursor
moves to the right one place. If you need to use the same key two times
(example for double letters), move the cursor right using the arrow keys (left and
right soft keys).

REC-3950 Rev G
- PRINTER SCROLL 9B -
Contents string #1 Password: Operator
ENTER
Default: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
Once you have defined the string, specify where the string has to be placed on
the printed report. The coordinate is given in the following way:
0000000000111111111122222222223.
0123456789012345678901234567890.
+----------------------------------------> Y
00|This line printed first
01|This line printed second ^
02| |DIRECTION of
03| |PAPER
04|
05|
06|
.v
.X
Use the X-pos and Y-pos keys to enter the X and Y coordinates. Confirm with
ENTER. By specifying 0,0, the string is not printed.
- PRINTER SCROLL 9C -
Position string #1 Password: Operator
X= 0 Y= 0
ENTER X\Y=pos
X Y
Default: 5 1
Min: 0 1
Max: 24 80
If you specified more strings, enter the relevant data using the same procedure.

REC-3950 Rev G
- PRINTER SCROLL 9D -
Contest string #2 Password: Operator
ENTER
Default: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
- PRINTER SCROLL 9E -
X= 0 Y=0
ENTER X\Y-pos
X Y
Default: 2 1
Min: 0, 1
Max: 24, 80
- PRINTER SCROLL 9F -
Contents string #3 Password: Operator
xxxxcxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
ENTER
Default: xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
- PRINTER SCROLL 9G -
X= 0 Y= 0
ENTER X\Y-pos
X Y
Default: 3, 1
Min: 0, 1
Max: 24, 80

REC-3950 Rev G
- PRINTER SCROLL 9H -
Position oper. total Password: Operator
X: 0 Y: 0
ENTER X-Pos Y-Pos
X Y
Default: 4 1
Min: 0 1
Max: 24 80
In a similar way, you can position the following variables in the print format:
The Reset Total:
- PRINTER SCROLL 9I -
Position reset total Password: Operator
X: 0 Y: 0
ENTER X-Pos Y-Pos
X Y
Default: 5 1
Min: 0 1
Max: 24 80
The Master Total:
- PRINTER SCROLL 9J -
Position master total Password: Operator
X: 0 Y: 0
ENTER X-Pos Y-Pos
X Y
Default: 6 1
Min: 0 1

REC-3950 Rev G
Max: 24 80
The Current Date:
- PRINTER SCROLL 9K -
Position date Password: Operator
X= 0 Y= 0
ENTER X-Pos Y-Pos
X Y
Default: 7, 1
Min: 0, 1
Max: 24, 80
The Current Time:
- PRINTER SCROLL 9L -
Position time Password: Operator
X= 0 Y= 0
ENTER X-Pos Y-Pos
X Y
Default: 8, 1
Min: 0, 1
Max: 24, 80
The Instantaneous Value of Rate:
- PRINTER SCROLL 9M -
Position rate Password: Operator
X= 0 Y= 0
ENTER X-Pos Y-Pos

REC-3950 Rev G
X Y
Default: 9, 1
Min: 0, 1
Max: 24, 80
The Average Rate Since the Last Print:
The average rate is calculated only on the periods of time in which rate has been
higher than 5% of capacity.
- PRINTER SCROLL 9N -
Position avg. rate Password: Operator
X= 0 Y= 0
ENTER X-Pos Y-Pos
X Y
Default: 9, 1
Min: 0, 1
Max: 24, 80
The Running Time Since the Last Print:
The running time is the time in which rate has been higher than 5%.
- PRINTER SCROLL 9P -
Position running tm Password: Operator
X= 0 Y= 0
ENTER X-Pos Y-Pos
X Y
Default: 0, 1
Min: 0, 1
Max: 24, 80
If the optional load out board is installed, the batch quantity and the batch total can
also be printed.

REC-3950 Rev G
The PRINT Key If the optional COMM board is installed, the PRINT key enables the printer to print
data.
The following screen is displayed:
- PRINTER SCROLL -
COLMM #1 no data Password: Not Required
Start print TOTALS
PRINT RETURN COM
The second line gives the status of the printer:
NO DATA Indicates the printer is idle, no data are being sent to the
printer.
IS RUNNING The system is sending data to the printer.
The third line indicates what kind of data is printed if the PRINT key is pressed. The
UP and DOWN keys select between:
TOTALS Print totals.

BATCH Only if load out option is active, print load
out information.
SETUP Print the setup data of the instrument.
TRAILS If audit trails option is active, print audit
trails data.
Print starts after the PRINT key is pressed.
The COM key allows the operator to select the printer in case more than one is
installed.
Here are some examples of data that can be printed:
Print TOTALS
TOTALS REPORT
DATE: 11-22-1998
TIME: 8:12a
MASTER TOTAL: 0.00 Tons

REC-3950 Rev G
RESET TOTAL: 0.00 Tons
OPERATOR TOTAL: 0.00 Tons
RATE: 0.00 TPH
Print BATCH:
BATCH REPORT
DATE: 11-22-1998
TIME: 8:12a
BATCH NR: 0
SET PT: 0.00 Tons
TOTAL: 0.00 Tons
Print ALARM:
11-22-1998 8:14a
Clock fail
Print SETUP:
INSTRUMENT SETUP
The system prints out all data and setups.
Print AUDIT TRAILS:

TRAIL RECORD NR 1
DATE 11-22-1998 TIME 11:59
VARIABLE scale cap
NEW 400.00
OLD 500.00
TRAIL RECORD NR 2
DATE 11-22-1998 TIME 11:31
VARIABLE span
NEW 250000
OLD 300000
TRAIL RECORD NR 3
DATE 11-22-1998 TIME 11:59
VARIABLE div (e)
NEW 0.05
OLD 0.1
Main Menu 6 Main Menu 6 is dedicated to Audit Trails and Linearization.

REC-3950 Rev G
- MAIN MENU 6 -
Press MENU for more
AUDIT
TRAIL LINEAR
Audit Trail This menu is only displayed if the Audit Trails option is installed.
Audit trail meets NIST HB 44 Category 3: Remote configuration capability, access

may be unlimited or controlled through a password. It consists of an event logger that
includes an event counter (000 to 999), the parameter description, the date and time
of the change, and the old and new value of the parameter. Parameters may be
configuration parameters or routine calibration.
Events and changes may be viewed on the Integrator's display or printed out by an
on-site printer.
The logger records the before and after setting of all configuration parameters that
affects the calibration of the scale. It also records when calibration was performed.
The event counter increments one count for each event.
Audit trail records the time and displays the new and old data for any change in the
items below, indicating each by an event number:
ZERO
SPAN
CALIBRATION METHOD
CHAIN WEIGHT
TEST WEIGHT
SCALE CAPACITY
SCALE DIVISION
SCALE MODEL NO.
IDLER SPACING
INCLINATION
LOAD CELL SIZE
LOAD CELL SENSITIVITY
LOAD CELL RESISTANCE
SPEED INPUT TYPE
DEAD BAND
MEASURE UNITS
REMOTE COUNTER DIVIDER
REMOTE COUNTER DURATION
AZT TRACKING RANGE

REC-3950 Rev G
NOTE: Changes in zero by auto zero tracking are not recorded. However, if AZT
limit is reached, it is recorded.
LINEARIZATION
- AUDIT TRAILS 1 -
Audit trails Password: Service
NO
CHOICE ENTER
Default: No
Selections: Yes, No
If the audit trails are enabled, meaning YES is selected, the following screen appears
for a short time (3 seconds):
- AUDIT TRAILS -
Use scroll keys or
enter trail number
After 3 seconds, the next screen is shown:
TRAIL EVENT No. 0000

hh:mm dd-mm-yyyy
nnnnnn = vvvvvvv/N
nnnnnn = vvvvvv/O
hh:mm Time of change

dd-mm-yyyy Date of change
nnnnnn Parameters name
vvvvvv Parameters values, after change new (N) and before change old
(O)
Time and date are shown only if an optional Communication board is installed.
The user can scroll between events which are displayed in order of date and time.
The user can also enter a number to display a specific event.

REC-3950 Rev G
Linearization Linearization is not normally used with conveyor belt scales. In case of extreme
instances where calibration at multiple flow rates may be required, please consult
the factory.

REC-3950 Rev G
Appendix E MT2201 Multi-Point
Calibration
This appendix contains setup and calibration menus for establishing multiple
calibration factors, both zero and span, for the weighing system.
Variations in conveyor belt tension affect the accuracy capabilities of a conveyor belt
scale. Causes of these variations may be the use of a reversing belt, multiple feed
points, or multiple products being conveyed that have a significant difference in bulk
density. In order to compensate for these changes in the system operation, and to
maintain weighing accuracy under varying mechanical influences, different calibration
factors may be used.
Up to 10 different calibration points are possible. Each calibration point will have its
own zero number, span number, and linearization table. To configure the linearization
table, refer to Appendix B (REC-3909). The different calibration points are accessible
through the front panel keyboard or via a digital input. When a calibration number is
selected, all of its associated values immediately become active.
Define Number of During the initial programming (cold start) of the integrator a theoretical zero and span
are computed and applied to all of the calibration points. From this point on, any zero
Calibration Points or span calibration that is performed changes only the currently active calibration
point.
Enabling multiple calibration points is performed through CAL DATA scroll. Press
MENU, MENU, CALIB. DATA and scroll down until the following screen is displayed.
Thermo Fisher Scientific E-1

REC-3950 Rev G
Number of calib. Password: Operator
1
ENTER
Default: 1
Min: 1
Max: 10
If number of calibrations selected is greater than 1, the scale symbol is added in the
RUN display with the active calibration number, as indicated below.
123.0 Tons
0.0 TPH
Selection of From 1 to 10 different calibrations can be programmed into the Micro-Tech 2201
Integrator. After selecting the number of calibrations as outlined in Appendix A/6, it is
Calibration Point necessary to determine which calibration corresponds with a particular operating
mode. The calibration number can be activated via the front panel keyboard or via a
remote digital input.
Front Panel Keyboard
To change calibration number from the front panel keyboard, press the soft key.
The following screen is displayed.
SELECT CALIBRATION
Calib. Number
1
ENTER
Enter the calibration number to be activated and press the ENTER soft key. Return to
the main RUN MENU. The active calibration number will now be in the lower left hand
portion of the screen. If an auto or manual zero or a manual or automatic span is
E-2 Thermo Fisher Scientific

REC-3950 Rev G
performed at this time, only the active calibration number is affected.
NOTE: If digital inputs are assigned to select calibration numbers, the

calibration number cannot be changed via the front panel keyboard. Attempting
to do so results in the following screen being displayed.
Selection calib.
In remote mode.
RETURN
Digital Input When the number of calibrations selected is greater than 1, scrolls are added to the
Digital Input Define (Dig. input def.). Scroll in I/O DEF SCROLL 4 as indicated below:
Selection
I/O DEF SCROLL 4 -

Dig. Input Def.
CAL. Sel2 0 NC
ENTER NC/NO NEXT
The number of Cal Sel ____ inputs is equal to the number of calibration numbers.
When an input is activated, the corresponding calibration number and associated
zero, span, and linearization table is also activated. In the event that more than one
input is activated, the first input active will be used.
When an auto zero or auto span is executed, the results are saved to the active
calibration number. Once a calibration test has been initiated, changing the active
calibration number via the digital inputs will have no effect; the calibration factors,
zero, or span will be saved to the calibration number that was active at the beginning
of the test.
Linearization In the linearization scroll, the table of linearization factors displayed are only for the
active calibration number.
Thermo Fisher Scientific E-3

REC-3950 Rev G
Addendum A
Addendum A December 2005 Software Version 33.17.03.01- B1
Introduction
This addendum is to be used in conjunction with the current released version of the Operation and Service Manual
for the 2201 Belt Conveyor Scale Integrator (REC-3950, Rev D). All information contained herein may not follow
other released versions of the documentation, nor will it pertain to software versions prior to 33.17.03.10.
Version 33.17.03.10 software for the 2201 Belt Conveyor Scale Integrator has been revised to meet zero load
testing requirements as outlined in the 2005 edition of NIST Handbook-44. The changes to the Belt Conveyor Scale
Code in Handbook-44 allow the user to perform zero load testing for a shorter period of time than normally required
to obtain a minimum test load. One of the criteria in determining the minimum test load is a belt run time of at least
10 minutes. When using an electronic integrator, zero load tests are now allowed to be performed in as short as
three minutes, using multiples of whole belt revolutions.
In addition to test time, the operational window for Auto Zero and Semi-automatic Zero can be extended from 2% of
full scale to 5% of full scale if the zero data before and after each delivery is recorded.
New and revised scrolls found in the 2201 Integrator are defined in the following chapters.
Installation
Before proceeding with set-up of new software, it is necessary to confirm the version of software installed in the
2201 Integrator. Locate the two PROMS containing the software, labeled U3 and U4 (see figure). This addendum
pertains only to software with a version of 3.10 or higher, please disregard if an older version is installed.
To upgrade software, please refer to manual REC-4051.
Thermo Fisher Scientific Addendum A-1

REC-3950 Rev G
Figure Addendum A-1. Micro-Tech Mother Board
Addendum A-2 Thermo Fisher Scientific

REC-3950 Rev G
New Scroll Zero Calibration Duration
Information During initial set-up a new scroll will be displayed instruction the user to input the
number of test durations. Press CHOICE to select 1 or 2. If all calibrations are to
be run for the same period of time and using the same number of belt revolutions
select 1. If it is desired to be able to perform Zero Load Testing over a shorter
number of belt revolutions and in less time than normally required to deliver a
minimum test load, then select 2. If 2 is selected, the instrument will
automatically calculate the short test time and length after completing the full
acquire test duration.

Nr. of test duration
> 1
CHOICE ENTER
Default: 1
Selections: 1 or 2
If 2 test durations are selected, the following scroll will be displayed when
performing an AUTO ZERO calibration.
- ZERO CAL -
Sel. Test duration to
Use for test length
1-L 2-S EXIT
Pressing the soft key under 1-L will start the AUTO ZERO test using the full test
duration established using the minimum 3 belt revolutions, 10 minute run time
requirements.
Pressing the 2-S soft key will start the AUTO ZERO test using the three minute
and multiple of full revolutions requirements.
Pressing EXIT will return to the beginning of the ZERO cal scroll.
AXT Duration It is also possible to utilize the short ZERO test for AUTO ZERO Track or AZT. If
AZT is set to YES in MAIN MENU 2, SCALE DATA SCROLL 13, then the following
scroll will be displayed. Pressing the CHOICE soft key will toggle between the full
and short test length.

REC-3950 Rev G
- CAL DATA SCROLL 13E -
Auto zero tracking
Test duration > 1-L <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: 1-L
Selections: 1-L or 2-S
Pressing the soft key under CHOICE and selecting 1-L will enable the full test
duration for AZT established using the minimum 3 belt revolutions, 10 minute run
time requirements.
Pressing the soft key CHOICE and selecting 2-S will enable the short test
duration using the three minute and multiple of full revolutions requirements.
In both cases the delay / sample time prior to performing the actual ZERO test, will
be 1/2 the test duration selected.
Material When performing a Material Calibration, the second screen viewed has been
modified to reduce confusion. The revised scroll now is displayed as follows:
Calibration
Press continue and

run a quantity of
CONTINUE
Zero Data Printing It is now possible to record all ZERO correction data directly to a printer. The data
capture can be configured for operator assisted AUTO ZERO, for AUTO ZERO
TRACK (AZT), or both. Configuration is made via Main Menu 5. The
communications protocol must be set to PRINTER (COMM A SCROLL 5).
Select the PRINT scroll and press the down arrow key to view scrolls 8 and 9 as
shown below.

REC-3950 Rev G
Print AUTO ZERO
> No <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: No
Selections: Yes, No
Selecting yes will generate print data as indicated below:
DATE: 11-16-2005
TIME: 12:47 p
AUTO ZERO COMPLETE

Error: 0.00 %
Old ZERO: 409
New ZERO: 410
ZERO Ref: 409
Total AZ% 0.00 %
If AUTO ZERO TRACK is enabled, the following scroll will be available.
Print AZT
> No <
CHOICE ENTER
Default: No
Selections: Yes, No
Selecting yes will generate print data as indicated below:
DATE: 11-16-2005
TIME: 1:02p
AZT COMPLETE
Error: 0.02 %

REC-3950 Rev G
Old AZT: 6
New AZT: 37
ZERO Ref: 409
Total AZT%: 0.03 %
High and Low The 2005 edition of NIST Handbook-44 has changed the limits where flow alarms
on belt conveyor scales must be activated. Therefore, the default range has been
Alarm changed accordingly in the scale integrator from 35% and 98% to 20% and 100%.
These settings are located in Main Menu 4, ALARMS DEFINE Scroll, ALARM
SCROLL 1A and 1B.
- ALARM SCROLL 1A -
Low rate set
20.0% 10 sec
ENTER DELAY UNITS
Default: 20% 10 sec

Min: 0% 0 sec
Max: 105% 90 sec
- ALARM SCROLL 1B -
High rate set
100.0% 10 sec
ENTER DELAY UNITS
Default: 100% 10 sec

Min: 0% 0 sec
Max: 150% 90 sec
Load Cell Failure The fault for the load cell failure has been changed from SHUT DOWN to
ALARM. This change can be viewed in MAIN MENU 4, ALARMS DEFINE
Alarm SCROLL.

REC-3950 Rev G
ALARM NUMBER #2
Load cell fail
Set as > ALARM <
CHOICE ENTER NEXT
Default: ALARM
Selections: ALARM, SHUT DOWN, NONE
Auto Zero Limit After a period of weeks or months, it is possible for the zero load being applied to
the belt conveyor scale to change by a significant amount. This may be due to belt
Alarm loss, viscosity change in idler grease, conveyor structure settlement or other
causes. Depending on the programmed limit for AUTO ZERO or AUTO ZERO
TRACK (0 - 5%) an alarm may be displayed indicating ZERO LIMIT EXCEEDED.
Before proceeding, the scale system should be carefully inspected and any
deficiencies found corrected (scale area cleaned, idler alignment confirmed, belt
tension and tensioning device inspected for proper operation,.etc.).
Once the scale area has been confirmed to be within tolerance, the alarm can be
turned off. This is accomplished by updating the ZERO REFERENCE. This value is
the ZERO number established when the device was placed into service. To reset,
select MAIN MENU 2, and the CALIB DATA scroll. Press the down arrow to access
CAL DATA SCROLL 16. The displayed number is the original ZERO number. To
change to the current ZERO number, simply press the SET soft key. The value
change will be recorded in the Audit Trails.

Zero Reference
24798
SET MANUAL

REC-3950 Rev G
4. Profibus-DP
Profibus-DP
Slave Protocol Manual
For the Micro-Tech 2000 Integrator
Model 2001/ 2101/2201/2301
REC-4063, Rev. C
Revision History
Revision Number Date Released ECO Number Release Specifics

Revision A June 1998
Revision B October 2000
Revision C August 2009 2149 Update name & phone numbers
2006 Thermo Fisher Scientific. All rights reserved.
This document is confidential and is the property of Thermo Fisher Scientific (Thermo Scientific). It may not
be copied or reproduced in any way without the expressed written consent of Thermo Scientific. This
document also is an unpublished work of Thermo Scientific. Thermo Scientific intends to, and is maintaining
the work as confidential information. Thermo Scientific also may seek to protect this work as an unpublished
copyright. In the event of either inadvertent or deliberate publication, Thermo Scientific intends to enforce its
rights to this work under the copyright laws as a published work. Those having access to this work may not
copy, use, or disclose the information in this work unless expressly authorized by Thermo Scientific.
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of Thermo Fisher Scientific and its subsidiaries.
Software Program Licence Terms
The Software Program is licensed, not sold. Thermo Fisher Scientific, grants you a license for the Software
Program only in the country where you acquired the Equipment, as defined below. You obtain no rights other
than those granted you under this license.
The term Equipment means the equipment with which the Software Program is used. The term Software
Program means the original and all whole or partial copies of the Software Program used in connection with
Equipment sold by Thermo Fisher Scientific to the user, including modified copies or portions of the Software
Program. Thermo Scientific retains title to the Software Program, as well as all improvements, modifications
and enhancements to the Software Program, whether made by Thermo Scientific or any other party. Thermo
Scientific owns, or has licensed from the owner, copyrights in the Software Program.
You are responsible for the selection of the Equipment.
Following the commissioning of the Equipment, any change made by the user to the Software Program will
terminate all warranties with respect to the Equipment and Software Program.
License
Under this license, you may:
1. Use the Software Program on only one piece of equipment at any one time, unless the license information
specifies otherwise;
2. Copy the Software Program for backup or in order to modify it;
3. Modify the Software Program and/or merge it into another Software Program; and
4. Subject to the following limitations, transfer the possession of the Software Program to another party, but
only in connection with a transfer of the Equipment.
If you transfer the Software Program, you must transfer a copy of these License Terms, all other
documentation and at least one complete, unaltered copy of the Software Program to the other party. Unless
you have other copies of the Software Program to be used in connection with other Equipment purchased
from Thermo, or one of its divisions, you must, at the same time, either transfer all your other copies of the
Software Program to the transferee of the Equipment or destroy them. Your license is then terminated. The
other party agrees to these terms and conditions by its first use of the Software Program.
You must reproduce the copyright notices(s) on each copy of the Software Program.
You may not:
1. Use, copy, modify, merge, or transfer copies of the Software Program except as provided in this license;
2. Reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software Program; or
3. Sub-license, rent, lease, or assign the Software Program.
Limitation of Remedies
Thermo Scientific entire liability under this license is the following:
Thermo Scientific will: (a) replace defective media, or (b) make a warranted Software Program operate or (c)
replace the Software Program with a functionally equivalent Software Program, as warranted.
For any claim (including breach), in any form, related in any way to this license, Thermo Scientifics liability
will be for the actual value of the Software Program.
Thermo Scientific will not be liable for any lost profits, lost savings, any incidental damages, or other
economic consequential damages, even if Thermo, or its authorized supplier, has been advised of the
possibility of such damages. Thermo Scientific will not be liable for any damages claimed by you based on
any third party claim.
General
Thermo Scientific may terminate your license if you fail to comply with the terms and conditions of this
license. In such event, you must destroy all your copies of the Software Program. You are responsible for
payment of any taxes, including personal property taxes, resulting from this license.
Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA)
The Occupational Safety and Health Act clearly places the burden of compliance on the user of the equipment
and the act is generalized to the extent that determination of compliance is a judgment decision on the part of
the local inspection. Hence, Thermo Scientific will not be responsible for meeting the full requirements of
OSHA in respect to the equipment supplied or for any penalty assessed for failure to meet the requirements, in
respect to the equipment supplied, of the Occupational Safety and Health Act, as interpreted by an authorized
inspector. Thermo Scientific will use their best efforts to remedy such violation at a reasonable cost to the
buyer.
Thermo Fisher Scientific Warranty
The seller agrees, represents, and warrants that the equipment delivered hereunder shall be free from defects
in material and workmanship. Such warranty shall not apply to accessories, parts, or material purchased by
the seller unless they are manufactured pursuant to seller's design, but shall apply to the workmanship
incorporated in the installation of such items in the complete equipment. To the extent, purchased parts or
accessories are covered by the manufacturer's warranty; seller shall extend such warranty to buyer.
Seller's obligation under said warranty is conditioned upon the return of the defective equipment,
transportation charges prepaid, to the seller's factory in Minneapolis, Minnesota, and the submission of
reasonable proof to seller prior to return of the equipment that the defect is due to a matter embraced within
seller's warranty hereunder. Any such defect in material and workmanship shall be presented to seller as soon
as such alleged errors or defects are discovered by purchaser and seller is given opportunity to investigate and
correct alleged errors or defects and, in all cases, buyer must have notified seller thereof within two (2) years
after delivery, or two (2) years after installation if the installation was accomplished by the seller.
Said warranty shall not apply if the equipment shall not have been operated and maintained in accordance
with seller's written instructions applicable to such equipment, or if such equipment shall have been repaired
or altered or modified without seller's approval; provided, however, that the foregoing limitation of warranty
insofar as it relates to repairs, alterations, or modifications, shall not be applicable to routine preventive and
corrective maintenance which normally occur in the operation of the equipment.
EXCEPT FOR THOSE WARRANTIES SPECIFICALLY CONTAINED HEREIN, SELLER DISCLAIMS
ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES WITH RESPECT TO THE EQUIPMENT DELIVERED HEREUNDER,
INCLUDING THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR USE. THE
SOLE LIABILITY OF SELLER ARISING OUT OF THE WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN SHALL
BE EXCLUSIVELY LIMITED TO BREACH OF THOSE WARRANTIES. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE
REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE WARRANTIES SET OUT ABOVE SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
REPAIR OR REPLACEMENT OF ANY DEFECTIVE ACCESSORY, PART OR MATERIAL WITH A
SIMILAR ITEM FREE FROM DEFECT, AND THE CORRECTION OF ANY DEFECT IN
WORKMANSHIP. IN NO EVENT SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
Purchaser agrees to underwrite the cost of any labor required for replacement; including time, travel, and
living expenses of a Thermo Scientific Field Service Engineer at the closest factory base.
501 90th Ave. NW
Minneapolis, MN 55433
Phone: (800) 445-3505
Fax: (763) 783-2525
Disclaimer
Though the information provided herein is believed to be accurate, be advised that the information contained
herein is not a guarantee for satisfactory results. Specifically, this information is neither a warranty nor
guarantee, expressed or implied, regarding performance, merchantability, fitness, or any other matter with
respect to the products, and recommendation for use of the product/process information in conflict with any
patent. Please note that Thermo Scientific reserves the right to change and/or improve the product design and
specifications without notice.
Contents
Chapter 1 .................................................................................. 1-1

Introduction........................................................................................ 1-1
1.1 General................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Profibus-DP ........................................................................... 1-1
1.3 Data Transfer ......................................................................... 1-1
1.4 Protection Mechanisms........................................................... 1-2
Chapter 2 .................................................................................. 2-1

Installation ......................................................................................... 2-1
2.1 General..................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Profibus-DP Interface Board ................................................... 2-1
2.3 Cable Type and Length............................................................ 2-1
2.3.1. Application ....................................................................... 2-1
2.3.2. RS 485 Repeater Application ........................................... 2-2
2.4 Profibus-DP Connector............................................................ 2-3
2.4.1. Bus Connector Wiring ...................................................... 2-3
2.4.2. Termination Power ........................................................... 2-4
2.5 Profibus-DP Board Installation................................................ 2-4
Chapter 3 .................................................................................. 3-1

Operation ........................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 General..................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Micro-Tech 2000 Configuration.............................................. 3-1
3.2.1. Slave Address and Buffer Dimensions ............................. 3-1
3.2.2. Profib Scroll...................................................................... 3-1
3.2.3. Baud Rate.......................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Data Transfer ........................................................................... 3-3
3.3.1 Write Operations................................................................... 3-3
3.3.2 Read Operations.................................................................... 3-5
3.4 Timings .................................................................................... 3-6
3.5 Communication Errors............................................................. 3-6
3.5.1 Diagnostics Data ................................................................... 3-7
3.6 Description of the Variable...................................................... 3-8
3.6.1 Legend .................................................................................. 3-9
3.6.2 Calibration Commands ..................................................... 3-13
3.6.3 Batch Commands.............................................................. 3-14
3.6.4 Reset Commands .............................................................. 3-14
3.7 Read Groups Composition................................................... 3-19
3.7.1 Read GROUP 0 - Dynamic Variables and Status............. 3-19
3.7.2 Read GROUP 1 - Load Out .............................................. 3-20
3.7.3 Read GROUP 2 - Sets and Thresholds ............................. 3-21
3.7.4 Read GROUP 3 - Display................................................ 3-21
3.8 WRITE GROUPS COMPOSITION.................................... 3-22
Thermo Fisher Scientific i

REC-4063, Rev. C
3.8.1 Write GROUP 100 - Commands ...................................... 3-22
3.8.2 Write GROUP 101 - Load Out ......................................... 3-23
3.8.3 Write GROUP 102 - Set and Thresholds.......................... 3-23
Appendix A ..............................................................................A-1
Floating Point Notation..................................................................... A-1
Appendix B ..............................................................................B-1
Micro-Tech 2000 Configuration ........................................................B-1
The GSD File .....................................................................................B-1
ii Thermo Fisher Scientific

REC4063, Rev. C
Chapter 1
Introduction
1.1 General
PROFIBUS was developed by the need to have an open, vendor independent
communication system that allows connection to any components used in the
automation of technical processes.
The PROFIBUS is a standardized communication system, all its
characteristics, rules and technical information are collected in the PROFIBUS
DIN normative.
There are three main variations of PROFIBUS corresponding to the intended
application: PROFIBUS-FMS, PROFIBUS-DP and PROFIBUS-PA. The
Micro-Tech 2000 variation is PROFIBUS-DP.
1.2 Profibus-DP
PROFIBUS-DP is the performance optimized version specifically dedicated to
time-critical communication between automation systems and distributed
peripherals.
It is typically used to transfer I/O images between a main PLC and remote
devices (sensors, actuators, transmitters, etc.). In this case, it will be used to
transfer (read and write) blocks of data.
PROFIBUS is a typical master/slave communication where the main PLC is
the master or scanner, and the Micro-Tech 2000's are slaves. The connection
is EIA RS 485 through a 2-wire twinax Siemens cable.
1.3 Data Transfer

The interface between the master and slaves is structured in parameterization,
configuration, and data transfer phase. In the parameterization and
configuration phases, each slave compares its real configuration with the
configuration data received from the master. When verifying the configuration,
device type, format and length of information have to be identical. This
guarantees a protection against a configuration fault. Maximum number of
data that is possible to transfer in this phase at one time is limited to 246 bytes
(123 words).

REC-4063, Rev. C 1-1
1.4 Protection Mechanisms
Besides the configuration, check to avoid erroneous configurations, the slave
uses the watch dog control to detect failures on the bus. If a slave recognizes
no successful data transfer with the master within the watch dog control
interval, it generates an alarm condition.

REC-4063, Rev. C
Chapter 2
Installation
2.1 General
This chapter describes the installation procedure and hardware configuration
for the PROFIBUS-DP interface option. If the PROFIBUS-DP option was
installed at the factory, skip to Section 2.3.
2.2 Profibus-DP Interface Board
The PROFIBUS-DP interface board (Figure 2-1) contains the Siemens SPC3
PROFIBUS-DP controller ASIC. The SPC3 controller is an integrated circuit
provided by Siemens that handles the interface between the Micro-Tech 2000
(slave) and the master.
No hardware configuration jumpers or switches are present on the
PROFIBUS-DP board.
Figure 2-1 Profibus-DP Interface Board
2.3 Cable Type and Length
2.3.1. Application
Different types of cables are available from Siemens for various applications
when assembling PROFIBUS networks. Standard Siemens PROFIBUS LAN

REC-4063, Rev. C
cable number 6XV1 830-0AH10 is available from Thermo Scientific, part
number 057415.
Consult the Siemens PROFIBUS network manual 6GK1 970-5CA10-0AA1 for
additional information.
2.3.2. RS 485 Repeater Application

An RS 485 repeater amplifies data signals on LAN cables and connects bus
segments. An RS 485 repeater is required in the following situations:
1. When there are more than 32 stations connected to the bus.
2. When electrically isolated bus segments are required, or
3. When the maximum cable length of a segment (standard LAN cable) is
exceeded (see Table 2-1).
TABLE 2-1
MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH OF A SEGMENT
(STANDARD LAN CABLE)
Transmission Rate Maximum Cable Length of a

Segment (in m)
9.6 to 93.75 Kbps 1000
187.50 Kbps 800
500.00 Kbps 400
1.50 Mbps 200
3.0 to 12.00 Mbps 100
RULES
If you want to install the bus with RS 485 repeaters, the following rules apply:
1. A maximum of 9 RS 485 repeaters can be connected in series.
2. The maximum cable length between two nodes must not exceed the
values in Table 2-2.

REC-4063, Rev. C
TABLE 2-2
MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH BETWEEN TWO NODES
(STANDARD LAN CABLES)
Transmission Rate Maximum Cable Length Between

Two Nodes (in m) With RS 485
Repeaters
9.6 to 93.75 Kbps 10000
187.50 Kbps 8000
500.00 Kbps 4000
1.50 Mbps 2000
3.0 to 12.00 Mbps 1000
2.4 Profibus-DP Connector
The bus connector should be rated for 12 Mbaud and contain a termination
resistor that can be switched on or off. Siemens bus connector 6ES7 972-
OBA20-OXAO is available from Thermo Scientific, part number 057416.
2.4.1. Bus Connector Wiring

1. Refer to the information sheet supplied with the bus connector and Table
2-3.
TABLE 2-3
BUS CONNECTOR
Bus Connector 9 Pin Sub _D_ SIEMENS LAN CABLE
1 Chassis Ground Braided Shield
2 ---
3 RxD/TxD-P Data Line B (Red)
4 Control-P (Receive/(not) Transmit)
5 Data Ground
6 Power (+5 VDC @ 100 mA max) Supplied by Micro-Tech 2000

REC-4063, Rev. C
TABLE 2-3
BUS CONNECTOR
7 ---
8 RxD/TxD-N Data Line A (Green)
9 ---
2. Connect the green and red cable wires to the screw terminal block
located in the connector. The two pairs of terminals for signal wires A
and B are identical.
The following scheme is recommended for a PROFIBUS LAN:
Terminal A: green wire
Terminal B: red wire
NOTE: The same wires (green or red) must always be connected to the
same terminal A or B in all bus terminals and with all bus
connections, and be uniform throughout the segment.
3. Ensure the braided shield is making metal-to-metal contact with the
connector guide.
2.4.2. Termination Power

Up to 100 mA of isolated 5 VDC is available on J1, pin 6 to power bus
termination or PROFIBUS optical link plugs.
2.5 Profibus-DP Board Installation

To install the PROFIBUS-DP board, proceed as follows:
1. Open the Micro-Tech wall mount enclosure and turn off power at the
mains, or remove panel mount enclosure from the panel and remove top
cover, allowing access to the mother board.
2. Remove the hex head mounting screw from the connector end of the
PROFIBUS-DP board (Figure 2-1).
3. Insert the PROFIBUS board in any available expansion slot on the
mother board (see Figure 2-2).
4. Insert the hex head screw through the chassis and tighten.

REC-4063, Rev. C
Figure 2-2 Model 2000 Mother Board
5. Replace the panel mount top cover and reinstall the panel mount
enclosure in the control panel.
6. Install the wired mating connector on the PROFIBUS board.
7. Turn power back on at the mains. The following screen appears when
power is restored and remains on for 10 seconds.
-SLOT # N CHANGED
Acquire new
configuration?
YES NO
The screen disappears after ten seconds. If the question is not answered, the
Micro-Tech 2000 assumes the answer is NO. HW (hardware) alarm is on and
cannot be reset. The above screen appears each time power is cycled if the
question is not answered.

REC-4063, Rev. C
Answer YES because this is a hardware configuration change.
Set-up data for the newly installed PROFIBUS-DP interface board must now
be entered. Proceed to Chapter 3.0, Operation.

REC-4063, Rev. C
Chapter 3
Operation
3.1 General
The Micro-Tech 2000 is a menu driven machine that allows the operator
easy access to the PROFIBUS-DP set-up scroll in Main Menu 5.
3.2 Micro-Tech 2000 Configuration

Main Menu 5 is dedicated to the Micro-Tech 2000 communication options:
COMM A serial communications, PROFIBUS-DP and PRINT. The PRINT
scroll is only visible if the COMM A board is installed.
3.2.1. Slave Address and Buffer Dimensions

The slave address and the buffer dimensions should be defined in the
PROFIBUS scroll. Repeatedly press the MENU key until Main Menu 5
appears.
- MAIN MENU 5 -
Press MENU for more
COMMA PROFIB PRINT
3.2.2. PROFIB Scroll

Defines the address of the Micro-Tech 2000 in the PROFIBUS net. Press
the soft key under PROFIB and scroll down.
- PROFIBUS SCROLL 1 -
Address Password: SERVICE
1
ENTER
Default: 1
Min: 1
Max: 126

REC-4063, Rev. C
Type in the address and press ENTER.
In the next two scrolls, the operator can define independently the read and
write buffer dimensions. This feature is very useful since it allows
reducing the address space to the minimum need.
The dimension should be entered in number of words. This number
includes the header of the telegram taking four words (see Table 3-1), so
the minimum is five words.
Read buffer dim.
Password: SERVICE
48 words
ENTER
Default: 48
Min: 5
Max: 48
Type in the number of words and press ENTER. The following screen
appears.
Write buffer dim. Password: SERVICE
48 words
ENTER
Default: 48
Min: 5
Max: 48
Type in the number of words and press ENTER. Press RUN to return to
the RUN menu or MENU for more menus.
3.2.3. Baud Rate

The baud rate is automatically detected by the Micro-Tech 2000 and is
displayed in Main Menu 3, TEST Scroll. Press the MENU key repeatedly
until Main Menu 3 appears.
- MAIN MENU 3 -
Press menu for more
DIAG TEST
Press the TEST key and scroll down.

REC-4063, Rev. C
- TEST SCROLL 9 -
Test communication B
19.2 kb Wait Prm
The baud rate and status are dynamically displayed. The status can be:
WAIT PRM The Micro-Tech is waiting for the PARAMETER message.

WAIT CFG The Micro-Tech is waiting for the CONFIGURATION
message.
DATA EXC The Micro-Tech is in the DATA EXCHANGE phase,

configuration and parameterization have been completed
successfully.
If the baud rate displayed value changes continuously, it means there are
problems on the line or the CPU is off.
Press RUN to return to the RUN menu or MENU for more menus.
3.3 Data Transfer

During the communication activity, the Micro-Tech 2000 will always act as
slave, meaning it will respond to a request from a master device on the
line, but will never attempt to send messages out.
The PROFIBUS interface allows a remote intelligent device to read and

write data from and to the Micro-Tech 2000. Data is organized in registers,
these registers are collected in several groups, some of them are read only
while others are write only groups. Groups are identified by a number,
numbers from 0 are reserved for read groups, numbers from 100 are for
the write groups.
The master has the possibility to perform two types of operations: write
data and read data. The first simply consists in sending to the Micro-Tech
2000 the values to write in the registers together with indications to identify
what registers have to be written. In the second case, the procedure can
be a little more complex since the reading operation can be proceeded by
a write operation to tell the Micro-Tech 2000 what registers should be read.
Write and read operations are explained in detail below.
3.3.1 Write Operations

The write telegram is composed of two parts, header and data. The
header consists of 4 elements (see Table 3-1):

REC-4063, Rev. C
1. Group Identifier
The group identifier identifies which group of data the master
wants to write. In some models of the Micro-Tech line (MT2100,
MT2102, MT2104), one Micro-Tech 2000 can handle two or more
independent scales so the Micro-Tech 2000 keeps in memory more
copies for each group. The group identifier is also used to
determine the scale. It is in two parts:
15 0
SN SN SN SN SN SN SN SN SN SN SN SN SN SN SN SN
SN Scale Number: 0x00 scale 1

0x01 scale 2
0x02 scale 3
0x03 scale 4
Gn Group Number:
The MSB identifies the scale. In case the Micro-Tech 2000 is configured
to work with a single scale, it should be set to 0. The LSB identifies the
group, see Section 3.6.
For example:
Hex 0102 read group 2, scale 2

Hex 0065 write group 101, scale 1
2. First Register Number

Registers in the groups are numbered from 0 to n and the master
has the possibility to write only a portion of the registers composing
the group. This parameter specifies the first register to write; 0
means the first register of the group.
3. Number of Registers to Write
This parameter specifies the number of register to write. It can be
set to 0 to indicate all the registers of the group. In case the
dimension of the write buffer is less then the length in words of the
group, putting 0 here is the same as putting the group dimension
minus 4 which is the length of the header.
4. Stamp
In the PROFIBUS protocol, data is transmitted continuously, so the
same telegram is sent by the master to the slave several times. To
avoid the slave interpreting the same data continuously (it would
create problems; for example, with the commands), the stamp is
used. The slave interprets received data only if the stamp is
different from the stamp received in the previous telegram. The
master has only to change the stamp value when it creates a new

REC-4063, Rev. C
telegram. The stamp of the last interpreted telegram is re-
transmitted by the Micro-Tech 2000 in the read buffer.
The Data section contains the data to write in the order MSB -
LSB.
When the Micro-Tech 2000 processes the package, before writing
the received data in the registers, it checks that all the parameters
are correct (Example: Group ident. refers to an existing group).
The data to write does not overlap specified maximum and
minimum limits (each writeable register has its own maximum and
minimum limit, see Table 3-4).
If it detects errors, the write operation fails and a DIAGNOSTICS
message will be activated.
Table 3-1 Composition of the Write Package
Elem # Register Type Offset Note

(words)
1 Group identifier Integer 0
2 First register Integer 1
3 Nr of registers Integer 2
4 Stamp Integer 3
5 Data #1 4
. ..
Data #n ..
3.3.2 Read Operations

In the PROFIBUS protocol, the master continuously reads data from the
slave. Since the Micro-Tech 2000 has a large number of registers that can
be sent to the master, the readable registers are collected in groups.
Therefore, the master should have the possibility to tell the Micro-Tech
2000 what group and what registers of the group it needs to read.
It does it by performing a write operation, in the mode explained above,
setting as group identifier the number of a read group. After the Micro-
Tech 2000 receives and interprets this write request, it starts to fill the read
buffer with the requested data.
NOTE: In a write operation, if the group identifier refers to a read group,
only the header of the telegram is interpreted. The data is ignored.
The Micro-Tech 2000 will remember which registers have been required
the last time and it will continue to update the read buffer with their actual
values.
What the Master receives after a read operation is a buffer of data having
the same structure of the write telegram (see Table 3-1). The first 4 words
will contain the group identifier, first register, number of register and
stamp, then the data.

REC-4063, Rev. C
After power on, the Micro-Tech 2000 starts to update the read buffer with the
register of the read group 0 (scale 1). The master receives:
Table 3-2 Composition of the Read Buffer after Power ON
Structure Read Data
Elem # Register Type Offset Value Note
1 Group identifier Integer 0 0 Ident for read group 0
2 First register Integer 1 0 From the first reg
3 Nr of registers Integer 2 nnn Number of word of the
group 0, it depends by
the MT model
4 Stamp Integer 3 0
5 Data #1 4 xxx Contents first reg
.. .. xxx .
nnn+5 Data #nn .. xxx Contents last reg
In the Micro-Tech 2000, the group 0 is the dynamic group. It contains

all the variables that change dynamically; for example, the actual weight
or speed, the totalizers. Other groups contain set-up data; for example,
the weight threshold set. Normally, the master will ask the group 0, only
when necessary will it ask other groups.
3.4 Timings
The Micro-Tech 2000 updates almost all its basic variables (e.g.; weight,
rate, totals) every 100 milliseconds. With the same frequency the Micro-
Tech 2000 updates the read buffer. If the master performs more
communications in this period, it will receive the same data more times.
The write request is interpreted by the Micro-Tech 2000 in polling with a

period of 100 milliseconds.
3.5 Communication Errors
The alarm condition PROFIBUS comm error is activated by the Micro-

Tech 2000 in two conditions:
1. If the SPC3 controller installed on the PROFIBUS interface board

does not recognize successful data transfer within the watch dog
control interval.
2. If the received data contains errors (value overlaps limits, register
number does not exist, group number does not exist).
The alarm can be defined as SHUT DOWN and the shut down digital
output can be used to set the system in a safety condition.

REC-4063, Rev. C
In the second case, the Micro-Tech 2000 also activates an EXPANDED
DIAGNOSTIC request to the master.
3.5.1 Diagnostics Data
The master system has the possibility to detect a communication error

condition by checking the diagnostics. In case of an error, the Micro-Tech
2000 will activate the request for diagnostic acquisition, indicating the
expanded device related diagnostics data is present.
When the master requires the diagnostics, it receives:
TABLE 3-3
COMPOSITION OF THE DIAGNOSTICS DATA
Bit Position Diagnostics data

Byte
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 StatStatus 1
1 StatStatus 2
2 StatStatus 3
3 MasterAdd
4 IdentNumberHigh
5 IdentNumberLow
6 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 Ext Diag Header
7 0 0 0 0 GE RE LE CE Ext Diag - Data
GE Group Error Invalid group identifier, the group does not

exist.
RE Register number Error The number of requested registers is wrong.
LE Limits Error A write operation has been performed but the

value to write overlaps the limits.
CE Coherency Error The master has tried to write or read partially

a variable composed by more registers (e.g.,
only one word of a floating variable).
The individual bits in Table 3-3 have the following meaning:
Bit 7: Diag.Master_Lock
The DP-Slave has been parameterized from another master. This bit is set by the
DP-Master (class 1), if the address in octet 4 is different from 255 and different
from the own address. The DP-Slave sets this bit to zero.
Bit 6: Diag.Prm_Fault

REC-4063, Rev. C
This bit is set by the DP-Slave if the last parameter frame was faulty (e.g., wrong
length, wrong Ident_Number, invalid parameters).
Bit 5: Diag.Invalid_Slave_Response
This bit is set by the DP-Master as soon as receiving a not plausible response
from an addressed DP-Slave. The DP-Slave sets this bit to zero.
Bit 4: Diag.Not_Supported
This bit is set by the DP-Slave as soon as a function is requested, which is not
supported from this DP-Slave.
Bit 3: Diag.Ext_Diag
This bit is set by the DP-Slave. It indicates a diagnostic entry exists in the slave
specific diagnostic area (Ext_Diag_Data) if the bit is set to one. If the bit is set to
zero, a status message can exist in the slave specific diagnostic area
(Ext_Diag_Data). The meaning of this status message depends on the
application and will not be fixed in this standard.
Bit 2: Diag.Cfg_Fault
This bit is set by the DP-Slave as soon as the last received configuration data
from the DP-Master are different from these which the DP-Slave has determined.
Bit 1: Diag.Station_Not_Ready
This bit is set by the DP-Slave if the DP-Slave is not yet ready for data transfer.
Bit 0: Diag.Station_Non_Existent
This bit is set by the DP-Master if the respective DP-Slave cannot be reached
over the line. If this bit is set, the diagnostic bits contain the state of the last
diagnostic message or the initial value. The DP-Slave sets this bit to zero.
3.6 Description of the Variable
The following table lists the variables accessible by the master specifically for the
Micro-Tech 2X01 Integrators.
It is necessary at this point to make a distinction between register and variables.
A register is the basic unit of the data at which the master can access. The
groups are structured in registers, they are numbered and the identification
number is used by the master to identify the portion of a group to read or write.
Their dimension is always one word.
A variable is the format for storing data in the Micro-Tech 2000 memory. Its
dimension can change depending on the variable type. We can have:

REC-4063, Rev. C
INTEGER variable An integer is a variable of 1 word (1 register). It contains
integer values in the ranges 0 to 65535 or +32767 to -
32768. The integer variables can be structured in array of
integers with various dimensions.
FLOAT variable A float is a variable of two words (2 registers). It contains

REAL values in the single precision IEEE format (see
Appendix A/1). The single precision format can represent
values in the range 3.4*10+38 to 1.18*10-38.
NOTE:
Some variables such as weight and rate are filtered before being displayed on the
Micro-Tech 2000. In regards to communication, the Micro-Tech 2000 always
sends the unfiltered value.
A lot of real values are displayed on the Micro-Tech 2000 with a number of
decimals that depend on the selected division. In regards to communication, the
Micro-Tech 2000 always sends the value with all the decimals.
For example:
Net weight Displayed value: 10.2
Sent value: 10.179982
3.6.1 Legend
- register A conventional name
- type Can be: RO The register can be read but cannot be written.
It will be inserted only in the read groups.
RW The register can be read or written. It will be

found either in the read or in the write groups.
WO The register can only be written. It will be

inserted only in the read groups.
- low limit The minimum acceptable value for the variable. Lower values
are considered as errors.
- high limit The maximum acceptable value for the variable. Higher values
are considered as errors.
- refresh t. The time between two updates of the variable in the Micro-Tech
2000's memory.
- format Can be: integer or float

REC-4063, Rev. C
TABLE 3-4
VARIABLES AND THEIR CHARACTERISTICS
Resister Type Low Limit High Limit Refresh Format

Time (mS)
Commands
Commands WO 0 65535 - Integer
Set/Reset Out# WO 0 (*) - Integer
Sim_Key WO (**) (**) - Integer
Dynamic values and status
Display RO - - 200 Integer
Status RO - - - Integer
Alarms RO - - 100 Integer
IO_Image RO - - 100 Integer
Rate RO - - 200 Float
Belt_Load RO - - 100 Float
Belt_Speed RO - - 200 Float
Master_Total RO - - 100 Float
Reset_Total RO - - 100 Float
Operator_Total RO - - 100 Float
Cal_Error RO - - - Float
Load out (batch)
Batch_Number RW 0 999 100 Integer
Batch_Dev RW 0 100.0 - Integer
Batch_Set RW 0 10000.0 - Float
Batch_Preset RW 0 10000.0 - Float
Batch_Preact RW 0 10000.0 - Float
Batch_Total RO - - 100 Float
Sets and thresholds
Scale_Cap RO - - - Float
Belt_Speed_Cap RO - - - Float
Belt_Load_Cap RO - - - Float
High_Rate_Set RW 0 105.0% - Float
Low_Rate_Set RW 0 105.0% - Float
High_Load_Set RW 0 105.0% - Float
Low_Load_Set RW 0 105.0% - Float
High_Speed_Set RW 0 105.0% - Float
Low_Speed_Set RW 0 105.0% - Float
(*) Maximum limit is the number of digital inputs. It depends on the hardware
configuration of the Micro-Tech 2000.
(**) All the values are accepted but only a specific set of codes are interpreted
as keys. See description of the variable.
Registers in the table are explained below and are sorted in alphabetical order.

REC-4063, Rev. C
Alarms
In the alarms register, each bit represents the status of an alarm. If the
alarm is active, the relevant bit will contain '1', otherwise it will contain '0'.
Alarms 1
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
A1.15 CLOCK FAIL A1.07 LOW RATE

A1.14 CELL FAIL A1.06 HIGH SPEED
A1.13 RAM FAIL A1.05 LOW SPEED
A1.12 ROM FAIL A1.04 WARM START
A1.11 SPEED SENSOR ERROR A1.03 COLD START
A1.10 HIGH LOAD A1.02 PWD DURING CALIB
A1.09 LOW LOAD A1.01 CAL TIME ELAPSED
A1.08 HIGH RATE A1.00 EXTERNAL ALARM 1
Alarms 2
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
A2.15 EXTERNAL ALARM 2 A2.07 HW CNF CHANGE SLOT 4

A2.14 EXTERNAL ALARM 3 A2.06 HW CNF CHANGE SLOT 5
A2.13 OVERFLOW TOTALIZER A2.05 HW CNF CHANGE SLOT 6
A2.12 AZT OVER LIMIT A2.04 BCD OVERFLOW
A2.11 BATCH DEVIATION A2.03 MATHEMATIC ERROR
A2.10 HW CNF CHANGE SLOT 1 A2.02 PRINTER ERROR
A2.09 HW CNF CHANGE SLOT 2 A2.01 COMMUNICATION ERROR
A2.08 HW CNF CHANGE SLOT 3 A2.00 RIO COMM ERROR
Alarms 3
15 NU NU NU NU NU NU 08 07 06 NU NU NU NU NU NU
A3.15 PROFIB COMM ERROR A3.07 DIGIT. FAULT (*)

A3.08 DIGIT. COMM ERROR (*) A3.06 DIGIT. POWER FAIL (*)
(*) Only for the Micro-Tech 2301.
Alarms 4
NU NU NU NU NU NU NU NU NU NU NU NU NU NU NU NU
Alarms 5

REC-4063, Rev. C
Batch_Dev The maximum acceptable deviation from the batch set point.
Usually entered by the operator.
Batch_Number The number of the currently running load out or the number of
the last finished one. The Micro-Tech 2000 will automatically
increment the batch number when a new batch is started.
Batch_Preset The preset point for the current or the next load out. Defines
when the rate will be lowered to increase batch accuracy.
Batch_Preact The set point of the preact for the current or the next load out.
Entered or downloaded by the operator (if in MANUAL mode) or
calculated by the Micro-Tech 2000. Defines when the load out
has to stop to compensate the queue of material from the
loading point to the scale.
Batch_Set The set point for the current or the next load out. Usually
entered or downloaded by the operator. For reading operations,
the Batch_set value is updated only when a batch is started.
Batch_Total The current contents of the load out totalizer. Usually read at
end of batch to check the result of the load out. This register is
automatically cleared when a new batch is started.
Belt_Load The instantaneous belt load in engineering units.
Belt_Load_Cap The maximum belt load of the instrument. This value is not
defined in the Micro-Tech 2000 setup, but it is internally
computed by the Micro-Tech 2000. It is the reference value for
the high and low belt load set points expressed in percent. It can
be read only.
Belt_Speed The instantaneous belt speed in engineering units.
Belt_Speed_Cap The maximum speed of the conveyor belt. It is the reference

value for the high and low speed set points expressed in
percent. It can be read only.
Cal_Error It is the error in percent resulting from a remote calibration. The

master can evaluate it before accepting the result of a remote
autozero or autospan.
Commands Each bit of the commands register is specified as follows. In

order to give a command, the Host must set the relevant bit to 1

REC-4063, Rev. C
and write (send) the register to the Micro-Tech 2000. The action
will be performed if the write message is accepted.
Commands
15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 NU NU NU NU NU 02 01 00
C1.15 AUTOSPAN RCAL

C1.14 AUTOSPAN WTS
C1.13 AUTOSPAN CHAINS
C1.12 AUTOZERO
C1.11 CONFIRM ZERO/SPAN
C1.10 ABORT BATCH C1.02 CLEAR OPERATOR TOTAL
C1.09 STOP BATCH C1.01 CLEAR RESET TOTAL
C1.08 START BATCH C1.00 RESET ALARM
3.6.2 Calibration Commands
It is possible to start a calibration function from a remote location. At the

end of the calibration (calibration flag in status registers should be tested to
determine when cal function ends), it is possible to verify the calibration
error (cal_error register) and eventually accept the new zero or span.
Autospan RCAL Start the autospan function with RCAL method. The
RCAL is automatically connected by the Micro-Tech
2000 at the beginning of the function and
disconnected at its end. AutoSpan RCAL has a built
in delay of 0.5 seconds after START is pressed. In
case a RCAL remote calibration is aborted, the
calibration flags will turn off after this delay.
Autospan WTS Start the autospan function with WTS method. An

output of the Micro-Tech 2000 can be programmed
to automatically load the test weights. This adds a
10 second delay at the beginning and at the end of
the calibration function. In case a WTS remote
calibration is aborted, the calibration flags will turn
off after this time.
Autozero Start the autozero function.
Confirm zero/span At the end of the calibration function, this command

tells the Micro-Tech 2000 to save the new zero or
span. If this command is sent during a remote
calibration, it aborts the running function.

REC-4063, Rev. C
3.6.3 Batch Commands
The batch can be controlled by serial.
Stand by Batch Temporarily stops a Load Out (batch) sequence.

Batch can resume if a Start command is sent later.
Stop Batch Stops a Load Out (batch) sequence.
Start Batch Starts a Load Out (batch) sequence.
3.6.4 Reset Commands
When the Micro-Tech 2000 receives a Clear Reset total or a Reset

alarm command, it executes the command for all the scales.
Clear Operator total Clears the operator total register.
Clear Reset total Clears the reset total register.
Reset Alarms Resets any pending alarm
In order to give a command, the Host must set the relevant bit to 1 and
write (send) the register to the Micro-Tech 2000. The action will be
performed if the write message is accepted.
Display The ASCII image of the Micro-Tech 2000 display.
High_Load_Set The set point for high weight alarm in percent of

the Belt_Load_Cap value.
High_Rate_Set The set point for high rate alarm in percent of the
Scale_Cap value.
High_Speed_Set The set point for high speed in percent of the

Belt_Speed_Cap value.
IO_Image The Micro-Tech 2000 has physical inputs and

outputs to which logical input and output
functions are associated. As far as

REC-4063, Rev. C
communication is concerned, only the status of
physical inputs and outputs are transferred.
IO_Image 1 - mother board inputs

NU NU NU NU 11 10 09 08 NU NU NU NU 03 02 01 00
IO1.11 in 4 - mother board IO1.03 in 4 - digitizer (*)

(*) Only Micro-Tech 2301.
IO_Image 2 - 4in/16out boards inputs

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
IO2.15 in 4 board 4i/16o #1 IO2.07 in 4 board 4i/16o #3

IO_Image 3 - 16in/4out boards #1 inputs

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
IOx.15 in 8 board 16i/4o #x IOx.07 in 16 board 16i/4o #x


REC-4063, Rev. C
IO_Image 7 - mother board outputs

NU NU NU NU NU 10 09 08 NU NU NU NU 03 02 01 00
IO7.03 out 4 - digitizer (*)
IO7.10 out 3 - mother board IO7.02 out 3 - digitizer (*)
(*) Only Micro-Tech 2301
IO_Image 8 - 4out/16in boards outputs

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
IO8.15 out 4 board 4o/16i #1 IO8.07 out 4 board 4o/16i #3

IO_Image 9 - 16out/4in boards #1 outputs

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00

15 14 13 12 11 10 09 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 01 00
IOx.15 out08 board 16o/4i #x IOx.07 out16 board 16o/4i #x


REC-4063, Rev. C
Low_Load_Set The set point for low weight alarm in percent of the Belt_Load_Cap
value.
Low_Rate_Set The set point for low rate alarm in percent of the Scale_Cap value.
Low_Speed_Set The set point for low speed alarm in percent of the Belt_Speed_Cap
value.
Master_Total The current value of the master totalizer.
Operator_Total The current value of the operator totalizer.
Rate The instantaneous rate in engineering units as currently displayed on

the RUN screen.
Reset_Total The current value of the reset totalizer of the Micro-Tech 2000. Reset
total can be zeroed by setting a bit in the commands register.
Scale_Cap The maximum flow rate of the scale. Entered by the operator in the
Micro-Tech 2000 setup. It is the reference value for the high and low
rate set points expressed in percent. It can only be read.
Set/Reset out# It is a variable that allows the master to directly handle the spare digital
outputs of the Micro-Tech 2000. There are 5 variables in the write
group so the master has the possibility to set or reset 5 maximum
outputs simultaneously.
To set or reset an output, it is only necessary to transmit the number of

the physical output with the most significant bit set to 0 to reset and 1
to set. If the content is 0, the command is ignored. The Micro-Tech
2000 does not control the output the master is setting/resetting if it is a
spare or not. If the master tries to change the state of a not-spare
output, a conflict could happen.
Sim_Key The master has the possibility to send a key code to the Micro-Tech
2000. Interpreted key codes are:

REC-4063, Rev. C
TABLE 3-5
KEY CODES
Key Key Code Key Key Code

UP ARROW 0048 H EIGHT 0038 H
DOWN ARROW 0050 H NINE 0039 H
DEC. POINT 002E H MENU 004D H
CLEAR 0053 H RUN 0052 H
ZERO 0030 H F1 003F H
ONE 0031 H F2 0040 H
TWO 0032 H F3 0041 H
THREE 0033 H PRINT 003C H
FOUR 0034 H TOTAL 003B H
FIVE 0035 H START 003D H
SIX 0036 H STOP 003E H
SEVEN 0037 H
Status The actual status of the Micro-Tech 2000 is resumed in four words,
each bit has its own meanings. When the bit is 1, the associated
status is true.
Status 1 - Generals
15 14 13 NU NU NU NU 08 07 06 05 04 03 02 NU NU
S1.15 Cumulative shut down S1.07 High rate
S1.14 Cumulative Alarms S1.06 Low rate
S1.13 Calibration running S1.05 High load
S1.04 Low load
S1.03 High speed
S1.08 Ready S1.02 Low speed
Status 2 - Control deviations & Batch

NU NU NU NU NU NU NU NU NU NU NU NU 03 02 01 00
S2.03 Batch Suspended

S2.02 Batch Phase
S2.01 Batch Phase
S2.00 Batch Phase
Batch Phase
Only applicable if Load Out option installed:

REC-4063, Rev. C
Bits 3 2 1 0
x 0 0 0 Batch not running
x 0 0 1 Not used
x 0 1 0 Batch running at high rate
x 0 1 1 Batch running at low rate
x 1 0 0 Waiting start delay time
x 1 0 1 Waiting coasting time
1 x x x Batch suspended
Status 3 - For further use

Status 4 - For further use

3.7 Read Groups Composition
3.7.1 Read GROUP 0 - Dynamic Variables and Status
Read Group 0 is the default group the Micro-Tech 2104 sends to the master
for a read request if the master does not change request (Table 3-6).
It contains dynamic values (rate, weight) and information about the status of
the Micro-Tech 2000.
TABLE 3-6
READ GROUP 0 (VAT1)
Elem # Register Type Offset (Words) Note

5 Status (1) Integer 4
9 Alarms (1) Integer 8
14 IO_Image (1) Integer 13

REC-4063, Rev. C
26 Rate Float 25
27 Belt_Load Float 27
28 Belt_Speed Float 29
29 Master_Total Float 31
30 Reset_Total Float 33
31 Operator_Total Float 35
32 Cal_Error Float 37
3.7.2 Read GROUP 1 - Load Out
It contains data regarding the load out function (Table 3-7).
TABLE 3-7
READ GROUP 1 [VAT2]

5 Batch_Number Integer 4
6 Batch_Dev Integer 5
7 Batch_Total Float 6
8 Batch_Set Float 8
9 Batch_Preset Float 10
10 Batch_Preact Float 12

REC-4063, Rev. C
3.7.3 Read GROUP 2 - Sets and Thresholds
It contains the definition of the thresholds and sets the reference values (Table 3-
8).
TABLE 3-8
READ GROUP 2 [VAT3]

5 Scale_Cap Float 4
6 Belt_Load_Cap Float 6
7 Belt_Speed_Cap Float 8
8 High_Rate_Set Float 10
9 Low_Rate_Set Float 12
10 High_Load-Set Float 14
11 Low_Load_Set Float 16
12 High_Speed_Set Float 18
13 Low_Speed_Set Float 20
3.7.4 Read GROUP 3 - Display
It contains the image of the Micro-Tech 2000 display (Table 3-9).
TABLE 3-9
READ GROUP 3 [VAT4]

5 Display (1) Integer 4

REC-4063, Rev. C
3.8 WRITE GROUPS COMPOSITION
3.8.1 Write GROUP 100 - Commands
Commands can be sent to set/reset outputs (Table 3-10).
TABLE 3-10
WRITE GROUP 100 [VAT5]

5 Commands Integer 4
6 Set/Res Out # Integer 5
11 Sim_Key Integer 10

REC-4063, Rev. C
3.8.2 Write GROUP 101 - Load Out
TABLE 3-11

5 Batch_Number Integer 4
6 Batch_Dev Integer 5
7 Batch_Set Float 6
8 Batch_Preset Float 8
9 Batch_Preact Float 10
3.8.3 Write GROUP 102 - Set and Thresholds
TABLE 3-12

5 High_Rate_Set Float 4
6 Low_Rate_Set Float 6
7 High_Load_Set Float 8
8 Low_Load_Set Float 10
9 High_Speed_Set Float 12
10 Low_Speed_Set Float 14

REC-4063, Rev. C
Appendix A
Floating Point Notation
Micro-Tech 2000 stores floating point data types using the IEEE single precision format. The format
contains a sign bit, an exponent field and a fraction field or mantissa.
The represented value
The value of the number being represented is equal to the exponent multiplied by the fractional part
with the sign specified by the bit sign field:
(-1)sign * (1.0+fraction) * s(exp-bias)
For detailed information, refer to the ANSI IEEE Standard for Binary Floating Point Arithmetic.
Sign Bit
The sign of the number being represented is stored in the sign bit. If the number is positive, the sign bit
contains the value 0. If it is negative, it contains the value 1. The sign bit is stored in the most
significant bit of a floating point value.
Exponent Field
Using an exponent increases the range of representable numbers. The exponent field of the number
contains a biased form of the exponent. A bias is subtracted from the exponent field, letting the actual
exponent represent both positive and negative exponents. The value of this bias is hexadecimal 7F;
therefore, the effective exponent (Rexp) of the number can be obtained as:
Rexp = Exp - 7F
NOTE: If both the exponent field and the fraction field are equal to zero, the number
being represented is zero.
Fraction field (Mantissa)
IEEE floating point format stores the fractional part of a number in a normalized form. It assumes that
all nonzero numbers are of the following form:
1.xxxxxxxx (binary)
The character x represent either 0 or 1 (binary).

REC-4063, Rev. C
Since all floating point numbers begin with 1, the 1 becomes the implicit normalized bit. It is the most
significant bit of the fraction and is not stored in memory. The binary point is located immediately to the
right of the normalized bit. All bits after the binary point represent values less the 1 (binary).
Example:
The number 1.625 (dec) can be represented as:
1.101 (bin)
This number can be represented in decimal as:
20 + 2-1 + 2-3 (dec) Or 1 + 0.5 + 0.125
Examples:
Some examples have been added to help in the understanding of the rules explained above.
Ex 1.
The number 100.0 is represented as: 42 c8 00 00 (hex) or:
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Bit 31 30 23 22 16 0
The sign is positive (bit 31 is 0).
The Exponent Field is: 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 (bin), 85 (hex). The exp is : exp = 85(hex) bias
(7F hex) = 6. Thus, the first implicit bit to 1 has weight 6.
At this point the mantissa can be represented in this way, with the weight of each bit.
26 25 24 23 22 21 20 2-1 2-2 2-3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ . . . . . . . . . ._
Bit Imp 22 0
Now it is enough to sum the weight of the bits at 1.
Value = 26 (imp) + 25 + 22 = 100.0

REC-4063, Rev. C
Ex 2.
Value = 0.15, binary representation is:
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Bit 31 30 23 22 0
Sign = 0 positive
Exp = 7C hex - 7F hex = -3
Mantissa =
2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Bit Imp 22 0
Value = 2-3 + 2-6 + 2-7 + 2-10 + 2-11 ...... = 0.15 (approx.)
Ex 3.
Value = -5.5, binary representation is:
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Bit 31 30 23 22 0
Sign = 1 negative
Exp = 81hex - 7F hex = +2
Mantissa =
22 21 20 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
Bit Imp 22 0
Value = 22 (imp.) + 20 + 2-1 = 5.5 (negative)

REC-4063, Rev. C
REC-4063, Rev. C
Appendix B
Micro-Tech 2000 Configuration
The GSD File
PROFIBUS devices have different performances characteristics. Features differ in regards to

available functionality or possible bus parameters, such as baud rate and time monitoring. These
parameters vary individually for each device type and vendor. For this reason, the PROFIBUS
Organization has standardized a database file, it contains all the characteristics of the PROFIBUS
device and must be delivered by the vendor together with the device. This file has a name that
depends on the vendor and an extension that is normally GSD, but can be different depending on
the country of origin of the device. The third letter of the extension defines the country:
D - Default, is valid for each country
I - Italian
G - German
E - English
F - French
P - Portuguese
S - Spanish
Refers to the manual of the device you are using as Master of your PROFIBUS network to get
information about how to use the GSD file.
These are the main PROFIBUS characteristics of the Thermo Fisher Scientific Micro-Tech 2101.
Vendor Thermo Fisher Scientific
Model Micro-Tech 2101
Ident number 0x2101
Protocol Standard DP
Baud rate supported From 9.6 kb to 12 Mb
Freeze Mode supp NO
Sync Mode supp NO
Auto Baud supp YES
Set Slave Add_supp NO
Station Type Compact
Prm Data Length 7
Diag Data Length 8
Config Data Length 9
Input data length (write buffer) 5-48 word, coherency over word
Output data length (read buffer) 5-48 word, coherency over word

REC-4063, Rev. C
To change I/O data length
The Micro-Tech 2000 gives the possibility to define the write and read buffer dimensions. Default
values are 48 words for both. If the operator changes them, he should also modify the GSD file
so the configuration in the Micro-Tech 2000 setup and in the file corresponds.
To make it is easy, the GSD file should be edited with a normal text editor and the value at the
directive module = at the bottom of the file should be changed. It normally appears as follows:
Module = "MT2000" 0xC0,0x6F,0x6F
The first value (0xC0) should be left unchanged, the second value specifies the dimension of the
write buffer, the third of the read buffer.
The value to set should be computed as follows:
Read_Buffer_Dim = 63 + RBD
Write_Buffer_Dim = 63 + WBD
where:
RBD is the read buffer dimension defined in the Micro-Tech 2000 setup.
WBD is the write buffer dimension defined in the Micro-Tech 2000 setup.
The value should be then converted and written in hexadecimal notation.
The meaning of the default values 0x6F is:
6F hex = 111 dec = 63 + 48
48 is the default dimension of the buffers.
Instructions are also contained in the GSD file.
The following is the contents of the Thermo Scienfific Micro-Tech 2101 GSD file.
R_MT2101.GSD:
#Profibus_DP
GSD_Revision =1
;
Vendor_Name = Ramsey
Model_Name = MT2101
Revision = Rev.A
Ident_Number = 0x2101
Protocol_Ident =0
Station_Type =0
FMS_supp =0
Hardware_Release = Rev.A
Software_Release = "33.GSD.01"
;
B-2 Thermo Fisher Scientific

REC-4063, Rev. C
9.6_supp =1
19.2_supp =1
93.75_supp =1
187.5_supp =1
500_supp =1
1.5M_supp =1
3M_supp =1
6M_supp =1
12M_supp =1
;
MaxTsdr_9.6 = 60
MaxTsdr_19.2 = 60
MaxTsdr_93.75 = 60
MaxTsdr_187.5 = 60
MaxTsdr_500 = 100
MaxTsdr_1.5M = 150
MaxTsdr_3M = 250
MaxTsdr_6M = 450
MaxTsdr_12M = 800
;
Redundancy =0
Repeater_Ctrl_Sig =0
24V_Pins =0
Implementation_Type = "ifak"
Bitmap_Device = "dev.dib"
Bitmap_Diag = "diag.dib"
Bitmap_SF = "sf.dib"
;
Freeze_Mode_supp =0
Sync_Mode_supp =0
Auto_Baud_supp =1
Set_Slave_Add_supp =0
Min_Slave_Intervall = 500
;
Modular_Station =0
Modul_Offset =1
Max_User_Prm_Data_Len =7
;
Fail_Safe =0
Slave_Family =5
Max_Diag_Data_Len =8
;
Unit_Diag_Bit(0) = "Coherency Error"
Unit_Diag_Bit(1) = "Limits Error"
Unit_Diag_Bit(2) = "Register Number Error"
Unit_Diag_Bit(3) = "Group ID Error"

REC-4063, Rev. C
; Buffers dimension
;
; Standard buffer dimension is: 48 words read buffer (0x6F)
; 48 words write buffer (0x6F)
;
;
; Dimensions can be changed by modifying the last two values in the
; 'Module' definition below.
; The value should be obtained as follows:
;
; 63 + WB_WN or 63 + RB_WN
;
; where WB_WN is the wished words number for the write buffer, RB_WN is
; the wished words number for the read buffer.
;
: The value should be converted in hexadecimal format. Default value
; hex 6F corresponds to:
;
; 63 + 48 = 111 dec = 6F hex
;
; WB_WN and RB_WN values must be entered also in the Micro-Tech 2000 setup
; in decimal format.
;
;
; Write buffer + + Read buffer
; | |
; V V
;
Module = "MT2000" 0xC0,0x6F,0x6F
1
EndModule
;
B-4 Thermo Fisher Scientific

REC-4063, Rev. C
5.Terminal wiring
6. GSD file Profibus communications
(see file: R_MT2101.GSD)
7. Junction box
CASSETTA DI GIUNZIONE
Modelli IT80-41P/D
JUNCTION BOX
Model IT80-41P/D
Manuale dUso e Manutenzione

Operating and Service Manual
06-11-03 0 Cattaneo D.. Issued
DATA REV. PREPARATO APPROVATO DESCRIZIONE
DATE REV. DRAWN-UP APPROVED DESCRIPTION
Document / File : JB-IT80-41D
INDICE GENERALE GENERAL INDEX
1. Generalita 1. Generality
2. Garanzia 2. Warranty
3. Dati Tecnici 3. Technical Data
4. Ispezione e Disimballaggio 4. Inspecting and Unpacking
5. Montaggio 5. Mounting
6. Collegamenti Elettrici 6. Electrical Wiring
Allegati : Annexes :
Disegni Meccanici ed Elettrici Mechanical and Electrical
Drawings
2
1. Generalit 1. Generality
Questo manuale fornisce e informazioni This manual includes the description and
necessarie per linstallazione e luso della the information necessary for installation,
cassetta di giunzione, Mod. IT80-41P/D. and use of junction box , Mod. IT80-
Alla cassetta di giunzione si possono 41P/D.
collegare : The following instruments can be
N2 Celle di carico (strani gauge) connected to the junction box :
collegate in parallelo. Nr: 2 Strain gauge load cells in parallel.
N1 Trasmettitore di velocita. Nr.1 Speed transmitter.
La cassetta di giunzione puo essere This junction box is suitable to be
interfacciata con qualsiasi sistema di connected with all instruments Thermo
pesatura dinamica con strumentazione Ramsey for dinamic weighing systems.
Thermo Ramsey. Furthemore, Nr.11 terminals (option
Sono inoltre opzionabili (Mod.IT80- Mod.IT80-41P/D1) are available for
41P/D1) N11 morsetti per collegare connecting belt protection devices.
eventuali apparecchi di protezione Max voltage on terminal block 110VAC.
nastro.
Massima tensione applicabile ai morsetti
110VAC.
2. Garanzia 2. Warranty
La garanzia ha durata di dodici mesi dalla The guarantee covers 12 months from
messa in servizio, ma non oltre diciotto start-up, but not more than 18 months
mesi dalla consegna. from the delivery.
La garanzia consiste nell'impegno della The guarantee consists in Thermo
Thermo Ramsey di intervenire, nel corso Ramsey's obligations to intervene, during
di durata della stessa, per rimuovere the guarantee period, to remove possible
eventuali vizi, ed effettuare i necessari defects and carry out the required
interventi al fine di rendere i macchinari e interventions in order to make the
le apparecchiature funzionanti secondo lo equipment working in accordance with
standard, sempre che le manchevolezze the standard, provided that the said
dipendano da cause di fabbricazione e defects are for manufacturing causes and
non da difettosa installazione, not for installation, keeping, handling or
conservazione, manipolazione o not correct maintenance operations.
manutenzione non accurate. The guarantee covers the free charge
La garanzia copre la riparazione o repair or substitution of faulty parts at
sostituzione gratuita della parte guasta Thermo Ramsey's workshop. The
presso il laboratorio Thermo Ramsey. transport from the Customer will be at
Il trasporto delle parti in garanzia e a Customer's charge.
carico del Cliente.
3
3. Dati Tecnici 3. Technical Specifications
- Grado di protezione IP56. - IP56 protection degree.

- Contenitore in Poliestere - Polyester Housing
- Colore Grigio RAL 7035. - Colour Gray RAL 7035.
- Ingresso cavi : - Cable inlet:
Cavi Celle 3/8 Gas (PG9) Load cells 3/8 Gas(PG9).
Uscita cavo:1/2 Gas (PG13,5). Cable outlet:1/2 Gas (PG13,5).
- Morsettiera adatta per connessione con -Terminal board suitable for connection of
conduttori di sezione 1,5 mm max. ; wires with 1,5 mm cross section max. ;
per versioni speciali la sezione max. dei for special version the max. cross
conduttori pu essere di 2,5 mm. section of wires should be 2,5 mm.
- Temperatura ambiente : - Environmental temperature :
Esercizio -20 +60 C Operation -20 +60 C
Stoccaggio -40 +70 C Stocking -40 +70 C
Umidit max. 90% (senza condensa) - Relative humidity max 90% (not
- Massima tensione applicabile ai condensate)
morsetti opzionali :110VAC - Maximum voltage for optional
terminal:110VAC .
4. Ispezione e Disimballaggio 4. Inspecting and Unpacking
La cassetta Mod.IT80-41P viene The Junction boxes are completely tested

completamente collaudata e and rightly packed at the factory.
correttamente imballata in fabbrica. Prima Before unpacking, be certain to check the
di disimballare lappercchiatura, package for external damage as the
accertarsi che il contenitore non sia stato carrier can often be held responsible for
danneggiato esternamente. Se cio si shipping damages. In case of any
verificasse, avvisare immediatamente il damage, please inform the carrier and
trasportatore e il magazzino Thermo Thermo Ramsey
Ramsey.
5. Montaggio 5.Mounting
Scegliere una posizione in modo tale che If its possible choose a position in such
i cavi delle celle e del trasmettitore di a way that the load cells' and speed
velocit vengano collegati direttamente transmitter's cables, come directly
alla scatola di giunzione, senza effettuare connect to the junction box, avoiding any
giunzioni. joint.
Le cassette di giunzione sono previste Junction boxes are supplied for external
per il montaggio all'aperto, ma mounting, but it is suggest to repair it
consigliato che venga installata in from rain. It's better to install the
posizione riparata dalla pioggia e a circa instrument 1,5 mt. high so to make easier
1,5 mt. di altezza, per facilitare l'accesso any check. Mounting place has to be
alle operazioni di controllo, in un luogo carefully chosen, avoiding instrument
scelto con cura, ed evitando esposizioni exposure to excessive vibrations, heath
dello strumento ad eccessive vibrazioni, and humidity.
calore ed umidit. Le dimensioni della You can find box dimensions and fixing
scatola e le quote di fissaggio sono measures in the attached drawings.
indicate nei disegni allegati.
4
6. Collegamenti Elettrici 6. Electrical Wirings
Il contenitore predisposto con : The Junction Box is foreseen with :

- due ingressi per il collegamento delle - two inputs to connect the two load cells
due celle di carico. - one input to connect the speed
- un ingresso per il collegamento con il transmitter.
trasmettitore di velocita. - one to connect the instrument.
- un ulteriore ingresso per il cavo
destinato allo strumento di controllo. Si We suggest cables protection with
consiglia la protezione dei cavi con flexible or rigid pipe to assure mecanichal
tubazione rigida o flessibile per garantirne protection to cables.
la protezione meccanica.
Per il collegamento con lo strumento di For connection with weighing instruments
pesatura, utilizzare il cavo per celle tipo use Thermo Ramsey cable, complete
Thermo Ramsey completo di conduttori with sensing cable, or 4x1,5mmq
per la compensazione di linea (sensing) shielded.
oppure un cavo schermato 4X1,5mmq.
Se la distanza fra la cassetta di giunzione Use sensing connection (cable shielded
e lo strumento di controllo superiore a 2x1,5mmq) for distance higher 60m from
60m necessario utilizzare un ulteriore weighing instrument.
cavo schermato 2x1,5mmq per la
compensazione di linea (sensing). For connecting the speed transmitter use
Per il collegamento con il trasmettitore di cable shielded 3X2.5mmq.
velocita utilizzare un cavo schermato
3x2,4mmq.
Attenzione ! Attention !
Prevedere il percorso dei cavi delle Do not run wires signal with as power
celle e dello strumento di pesatura in lines, and auxiliary circuits.
conduit separati dai cavi di potenza e
dei circuiti ausiliari.
5
6
7

Pesómetro - PUV DF S E SL01 5904 - 00 - 0 PDF

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Pesómetro - PUV DF S E SL01 5904 - 00 - 0 PDF

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

CLIENTE/CUSTOMER:

Dosier Tcnico Electrico y de IC Pesometro

Belt scale Technical Electrical & IC Dossier

NMERO DE DOCUMENTO DE PROYECTO/PROJECT DOC NUMBER: ED: REV:

PROPSITO DE LA EDICIN/ ISSUE PURPOSE: INFORMATION FECHA/DATE:

SELLO DF/DF STAMP: APROB/ E.S FECHA/ 3-05-2016

REALIZ/ FECHA/ 3-05-2016

N DOCUMENTO DE PROYECTO/PROJECT DOCUMENT NUMBER:

6. GSD file Profibus communications

TAG WT04 ITEM WT04 P PANNEL F FIELD 1

DESCRIPTION MODEL SLOT POSITION

MOTHER BOARD OP13 X A B - SPEED FILTER

CLOSED = COLD START FORCED

VERSION : POWER SUPPLY : 120 V (AVILABLE : 110V ; 120V ; 220V ; 240V)

A/D BOARD J6 OP1 X A B - SENSING SELECTION

OP2 X A B - A (CLOSED) = INTERNAL SENSING

CURRENT OUT 2101IOUT1SCH J5

NO X RATE WEIGHT Kg/m SPEED

ANALOG I/O 2101IOUT2SCH OUT 1 : mA (AVAILABLE : 0-20 mA / 4-20 mA)

BOARD YES OUT 2 : mA (AVAILABLE : 0-20 mA / 4-20 mA)

(2IN / 2 OUT) X NO INPUT 1 : ________________ R= ________________ INCLIN.

INPUT 2 : ________________ R= ________________ MOISTURE

COMM "A" 2101COMMSCH J2 OP1 OP2 OP3 OP4 OP5 OP6

X NO RS485 B B B B MDP TRM

OP7 : A STANDARD B PRINTER

SYSTEM DATA SPEED TRANSMITTER

LOAD CELL/S BELT SCALE

TEST A EMISSIONE/ISSUED 25/01/2016 CAVENAGO

REV. DESCRIPTION DATE COMP.

SERVICE BELT SCALE MODEL : 10-14/4 SERIAL N 1

CAL ZERO MANUAL ZERO

SCALE DATA SCROLL

1. MAX SCALE CAPACITY 1500 (500.0t) 2. SCALE DIVISION 1 (0,1)

A EMISSIONE/ISSUED 25/01/2016 CAVENAGO

APPROVED BY : DURO FULGUERA Thermo Ramsey

SERVICE BELT SCALE MODEL : 10-14/4 SERIAL N 1

CALIBRATION DATA SCROLL

1. CALIBRATION MODE WEIGHT (RCAL) 2. RCAL SELECTED 165000 (165Kohm)

1. PROTECTION LEVEL ______________ NONE _____________ LIMITED _____________ PROTECTED

1. A / D GROSS ____________ 2. SIGNAL ON LOAD CELL ____________

A EMISSIONE/ISSUED 25/01/2016 CAVENAGO

APPROVED BY : DURO FULGUERA Thermo Ramsey

SERVICE BELT SCALE MODEL : 10-14/4 SERIAL N 1

I/O DEFINE SCROLL

1. CURRENT OUTPUT 1 DEFINE RATE CURRENT OUTPUT 2 DEFINE ____________

1. RATE ALARM YES NO 2. LOAD ALARM YES NO

A EMISSIONE/ISSUED 25/01/2016 CAVENAGO

APPROVED BY : DURO FULGUERA Thermo Ramsey

SERVICE BELT SCALE MODEL : 10-14/4 SERIAL N 1

5. ALARM DEFINITION AS NONE ALARMS SHUT DOWN

LOAD OUT SCROLL

1. PRESET WEIGHT _______________ (0,0 t) 2. PREA ACT CORRECT _______________ (manual)

A EMISSIONE/ISSUED 25/01/2016 CAVENAGO

APPROVED BY : DURO FULGUERA Thermo Ramsey

SERVICE BELT SCALE MODEL : 10-14/4 SERIAL N 1

1. HANDSHAKING ____________ (none) 2. END OF LINE ____________ (cr + lf)

1. LINEARIZATION YES NO 2. LOAD FULL SCALE ____________ (50 kg/m)

A EMISSIONE/ISSUED 25/01/2016 CAVENAGO

APPROVED BY : DURO FULGUERA Thermo Ramsey

TAG WT02 ITEM WT02 P PANNEL F FIELD 1

DESCRIPTION MODEL SLOT POSITION

MOTHER BOARD OP13 X A B - SPEED FILTER

CLOSED = COLD START FORCED

(2IN / 2 OUT) X NO INPUT 1 : R= INCLIN.

INPUT 2 : R= MOISTURE

1. PROTECTION LEVEL ________ NONE _ LIMITED _______ PROTECTED

1. A / D GROSS 2. SIGNAL ON LOAD CELL

1. PRESET WEIGHT _ (0,0 t) 2. PREA ACT CORRECT _ (manual)

1. HANDSHAKING (none) 2. END OF LINE (cr + lf)

(2IN / 2 OUT) X NO INPUT 1 : R= INCLIN.

INPUT 2 : R= MOISTURE

1. PROTECTION LEVEL ________ NONE _ LIMITED _______ PROTECTED

1. A / D GROSS 2. SIGNAL ON LOAD CELL

1. PRESET WEIGHT _ (0,0 t) 2. PREA ACT CORRECT _ (manual)

1. HANDSHAKING (none) 2. END OF LINE (cr + lf)